Specifications (4) I 26,402005,0c)09 7
��,� RECEIVED
9,-
�wP // ) P
PROJECT MANUAL MAR ® 2005
FOR:
CITY OF TIGARD
1 BUILDING DIVISION
I
TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL
I ADDITION / REMODEL
PHASE III
CE2 /TRANSITIONS
for
I (OWNER)
0 Tigard - Tualatin School District
6960 Sandburg Road
Tigard, Oregon 97223
1
I (ARCHITECT) .
Dull Olson Weekes Architects, Inc.
319 SW Washington St., No. 200
Portland, OR 97204
PH: 226 -6950 / FAX: 273 -9192
I 1P2 o III Ac0
" l 228 � �' acQ
, A ' I .' G
42 ? OF 0 4\ °9
'1
March 4, 2005
1 PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
I.
TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL
ADDITION / REMODEL
PHASE III
CE2/TRANSITIONS
CITY SET
1
pp
Tigard - Tualatin School District
6960 Sandburg Road
Tigard, Oregon 97223
111 March 4, 2005
I.
1
DULL OLSON WEEKES
architects Inc
1 SET NO. •
•
1
111 SECTION 00000
TITLE PAGE
PROJECT:
1 FACILITY CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT (BOND) PROGRAM - 2004/05
TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS & RENOVATION, 2005 - PHASE 3
1 BID PACKAGE NUMBER ONE
' PROJECT ADDRESS: ARCHITECT:
Tigard High School Dull Olson Weekes Architects
9000 SW Durham Rd. SW Washington St., #200
Tigard, Oregon 97224 Portland, Oregon 97204
Phone: 503- 226 -6950
Fax: 503- 273 -9192
e -mail: keithj @dowa.com
Project Manager: Keith Johnson
1 OWNER: STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:
Pi Tigard- Tualatin Schools Nishkian Dean
School District No. 23J 319 SW Washington Street, Suite 720
6960 SW Sandburg St. Portland Oregon 97204
Tigard, Oregon 97223 Phone: 503- 274 -1843
1 Fax: 503- 273 -5696
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE:
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
1 Cornerstone Construction Management, Inc.
5410 SW Macadam Avenue, Suite 250 MFIA, Inc.
Portland, Oregon 97201 2007 SE Ash Street
1 Phone: 503- 295 -0108 Portland, Oregon 97214
Fax: 503-295-1896 Phone: 503- 234 -0548
e -mail: rcrainone@cornerstonemgi.com Fax: 503-234-0677
Project Manager: Rick Rainone
•
GENERAL CONTRACTOR / CM /GC CIVIL ENGINEER
1 Robinson Construction Company SJO Consulting Engineers
21360 NW Amberwood Drive 6650 SW Redwood Lane, Suite 360
Hillsboro, Oregon 97124 Portland, Oregon 97224
Phone: 503 645 -8531 Phone: 503 -226 -3921
Fax: 503- 645 -5357 Fax: 503- 226 -3926
1 e -mail: jiml @robcon.com
Project Manager: Jim Little
02054. TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS / REMODEL — PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 00000 -1
1 Printed 3 05
I TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
Section 00000 Title Page .
00010 Table of Contents
DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS •
1 00020 List of Drawings NA
•
00100 Bid Solicitation : NA
I .00111 Substitution Request Form 2
00200 Instructions to Bidders 3
00400 Bid Form NA
• 00850 BOLI Requirements - On file and available for review at Dull Olson Weekes Architects
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I Section 01010 Summary of the Work 4
01028 Change Order Procedures 3
01045 Cutting and Patching 2
1 • 01060 Regulatory Requirements NA
01070 Abbreviations_& Symbols NA
01075 Definitions NA
01090 Reference Standards NA
I DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
PI Section 02072 Minor Demolition for Remodeling 3
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE .
I Not used
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
I Not used
I DIVISION 5 - METALS .
Section 05500 Metal Fabrications 8
I DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTIC
Section 06112. Framing and Sheathing 6
I 06200 Finish Carpentry 5
06410 Custom Casework . g
I DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07213 Batt and Blanket Insulation 2
1
07270 Firestopping 6
07900 Joint Sealants 7
I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J TOC -1
Primed 3.9.05
I TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS
•
Section 08000 Door and Relite Schedule • 9
I • 08110 Metal Doors and Frames - 5
. 08210 Wood Doors 5
08305 Access Doors 2
I 08700 Door Hardware 7
08800 Glazing 6
I DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
. Section • 09001 Interior Finish Legend g 3
09100 Metal Support Systems 5
, 09120 Ceiling Suspension System 3 •
09260 Gypsum Board Systems 5
09321 Ceramic Wall Tile 4
I 09511 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings • 4
09650 Resilient Flooring 5
09680 Carpeting 5
09900 Painting 9
I 09950 Wall Coverings 3
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Section .10120 Tacksurfaces 3
10400 Identifying Devices 5
01 10800 Toilet. and Bath Accessories 4
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
I Not used
•
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
Section 12512 Horizontal Louver Blinds 3
I DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Used.
I DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Not Used.
' DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
I Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 8
15060 Pipes and Pipe Fittings 3
15090 Supports and Anchors 4
15240 Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control 2
I 15250 Mechanical Insulation 3
15300 Fire Protection 4
15750 Heat Transfer • 1
I 15880 Air Distribution 4
02054 - TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR OS TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J TOC -2
Printed 3 %9'05
-- TABLE OF CONTENTS •
1 15990 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 5 .
. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
• Section. 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 8
16110 Conduits, Raceways and Fittings 4
I 16120 Conductors
16130. Boxes 2
16140 Wiring Devices 2
I 16190 Supporting Devices 3
16195 Electrical Identification 2
16450 Grounding 2
16500 Lighting Fixtures and Lamps 3
I • 16723 Fire Alarm and Detection. System 3
16735 GPS Wireless Clock System 4
• 16740 Data, Telephone, and CATV Systems . 1
I 16900 Lighting Controls • 4
•
I END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
•
I
Pl. . •
•
I , •
•
1 .
1
• •
• .
•
•
I ..
I • • . .•
1
•
I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
' MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J TOC -3
Printed 3/9!05
SECTION 00020
LIST OF DRAWINGS
I
LIST OF DRAWINGS (Bound Separately)
ARCHITECTURAL .
A0.11 MAIN FLOOR CODE SUMMARY
A0.13 MAIN FLOOR EXITING PLAN
A0.15 FIREPROOFING PLAN
' A0.30 EXISTING LOWER FLOOR PLAN
A0.40 EXISTING MAIN FLOOR PLAN
• I A0.60 WALL TYPES
A0.70 RATED CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
I A1.11 LOWER FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN •
A2.11 LOWER FLOOR PLAN -CE2 /TRANSITIONS
LOWER FLOOR PLAN- CE2 /TRANSITIONS .
ACCESSORIES /DIMENSIONS
A3.22 BUILDING SECTIONS
A5.11 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A6.11 . LOWER FLOOR RCP- CE2 /TRANSITIONS
A8.01 FRAME TYPES •
•
A9.01 INTERIOR DETAILS
A9.02 INTERIOR. DETAILS
A9.03 INTERIOR DETAILS
•
STRUCTURAL
S2.11 STRUCTURAL NOTES
MECHANICAL
' M1.21 MAIN FLOOR HVAC PLAN= CE2 /TRANSITIONS
ELECTRICAL
E1.0 ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LIST
E1.11 ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLANS - CE2 /TRANSITIONS
1
END OF LIST
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL PHASE III CE2ITRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 00020 -1
Printed 3 05
1
I - SECTION 00111
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
I •
TO: Dull Olson Weekes Architects
319 SW Washington St., # 200
Portland, OR 97204
I PROJECT: Tigard High School Additions / Remodel Phase III CE2 /Transitions Tigard - Tualatin School
District 23J.
We hereby submit for your consideration the Product described below as a substitute for the specified product
I. indicated:
•
Ii Specified Product:
.
Name:
I Section: Paragraph:
2. Proposed Substitution:
a. Brand Name:
b. . Model /Catalog No.:
c. Manufacturer:
(Name)
Pl• .
(Address) (Zip) (Telephone)
d. Nearest Distributor:
(Name) •
(Address) ' (Zip) (Telephone) .
e. Substitute product effects adjacent Work in the following way:
I .
1
3. Supporting Data:
I a. Attached data included product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and
- test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified.
I b. Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents which proposed
substitution will require for its proper installation.
I
02054. TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 00111 -1
Printed 3 205
SECTION 00111
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
1
4. Certification:
The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct:
a. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. . I
b. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailing
and construction costs caused by the requested substituion.
c. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect • on other trades, the construction schedule, or
specified warranty requirements.
111
d. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution.
e. The function appearance and quality of the proposed substitution are equal or superior in all respects
to the product specified.
5. Submitted By:
Finn:
(Name)
(Address) (Zip) (Telephone)
By: Title:
(Please type or print)
Signature: 1
6. Acceptance /Rejection:
Acceptable substitution items will be covered by an Addendum issued to all Bidders.
7. Architects Action:
The following is for use by the Architect:
Accepted Accepted with exceptions as noted
Not Accepted Received after deadline
Remarks:
r
By: Date:
For: Dull Olson Weekes Architects
END OF SECTION
02054. TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 00111-2
Printed 3.205
' SECTION 00200
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1
1. GENERAL INFORMATION
Robinson Construction Co. is the CM /GC for the Tigard High School Additions & Remodel
2004/2005 project. The project address is 9000 SW Durham Road, Tigard, Oregon 97224. Robinson
will be bidding portions of the work.
2. PPROJECT PHASES
This Phase 3 CE2 /Transtions Bid Package is scheduled to bid on . The estimate for Phase
3 CE2 /Transtions portion of the work is $.100,000. .
3. BID FORMS
We strongly urge you to use the bid form that will be provided by addendum. If you choose not to
use the bid form, please include the bid form information on your proposal.
4. BID BOND .
Bid bond or bid security is not required. Please provide surety information as requested on the bid
form.
5. VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES .
Voluntary alternates are encouraged. Please provide adequate information with your bid, including
discrepancy from specified product. All voluntary alternates will be subject to evaluation.
6. PROPRIETARY NAMES
The use of special brand name, make and model number in specifying an item is for the purpose of
fixing quality, type or function. Unless otherwise noted, products equal in quality and suitability to
those specified will be acceptable. Substitution requests from bidders are invited and encouraged.
7. ' BID OPENING
In addition to sealed bids, Robinson Construction Co. will receive bids via fax to: 503- 645 -5357 or
mail to: 21360 NW Amberwood Drive; Hillsboro, Oregon 97124.
BIDS A 2E RITE 2�0 M,.
Bids will not be publicly opened. Tigard - Tualatin School District 23J will be represented at the bid
' opening.
8. PREVAILING WAGE — JANUARY 1, 2004
' This contract is for a public work subject to the prevailing wage requirements of ORS
279.348 to 279.380. Questions regarding payment of prevailing wages may be directed to:
Bureau of Labor and Industries
Wage and Hour Division
' Prevailing Wage Unit
800 NE Oregon Street, #32
Portland, Oregon 97232
9. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2/TRANSITIONS
i MAR 05 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 00200 -1
Printed 3'92005 4:09 :00 PM
r
SECTION 00200
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Robinson Construction Co. will develop a progress schedule . to meet the project
requirements. Phase II is now under construction. This Phase 3 will start following the end
of the school year, on or about June 17, 2005. Phases 2 and 3 will complete in time for the
opening of school in August 2005.
10. PRE - BID CONFERENCE
A. Construction Conference: A pre -bid conference and tour of the site is scheduled for the
date and time listed in Section 00100 — Bid Solicitation. Conference attendance is
strongly encouraged for Sub - bidders. Items addressed which either substantially clarify
or alter the bid specifications will be issued to all prospective Bidders of record in the
form of an Addendum.
B. Site Visits: If the bidders need to make additional site visits, they shall contact Tigard- . I
Tualatin Schools Facilities and Asset Management at (503) 916 -3401 and ask to speak
with the respective Project Manager.
11. ACCEPTANCE OF CONDITIONS
By submitting a bid, each Bidder certifies that they have read, understand, and agree to be
bound by the bid /contract documents, has visited the site and is familiar with the conditions
and limitations under which the work must be performed.
12. STATE REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS
Bidders are required by ORS 701.035 to be registered with the State of Oregon Construction
Contractors Board in order to bid on this project. Bidders shall insert Bidder's current, valid
registration number and expiration date thereof in spaces provided in the Bid Form. 1
13. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS 111 Bidders shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, ancestry, national origin, religion,
sex, sexual orientation, marital status, age, medical condition, or disability in employment or
award of subcontractors.
14. . PRE - AWARD MEETING
Prior to the award of subcontractors, the apparent successful Bidders may be required to
attend a pre - award meeting. At this meeting the entire contents of the Bid Package will be
reviewed. The Bidder will discuss the requirements of the work, the time required for its
completion, and any other questions that either party may have. Personnel who have full
authority to act for the Bidder on all matters, both technical and contractual, shall represent
the Bidder at the pre - award meeting. Bidder's proposed project manager shall also attend
the pre -award meeting. '
15. FORM OF AGREEMENT
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III - CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 00200 -2
Printed 3, 4:09:00 PM
1
SECTION 00200
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1
A. The Agreement between the Subcontractors for the work of this project will be executed
by Robinson Construction Co., Standard Form of Agreement, long form or short form
(short form is for suppliers only).
B. An example of the documents may be examined at the office of Robinson Construction
Co.
The Owner, Architect and Robinson Construction Co. will review the bids. The awards will
be made based on what is the most beneficial for the project, not necessarily the low bid.
END OF SECTION 00200
•
1
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL PHASE III CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 00200 -3
Primed 394005 4:09:00 PM
1 .
•
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF THE WORK
•
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS - INCLUDED •
A. General Requirements.
I B. Contractor Use of Premises.
•
C. Owner Occupancy.
1 D. Related Work by Owner.
E. Owner Furnished Products.
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. TIME OF COMPLETION
The work of this Contract shall be commenced on the date of written notice to proceed and shall
be completed by dates established in the Agreement.
B. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
The Contractor acknowledges and agrees to abide by all provisions of General Conditions of the
Contract regarding liquidated damages as it pertains to all work under this Contract.
C. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Associated General Contractors of America, Inc., "Manual of Accident Prevention in
Construction ", Workmen's Compensation Board "Safety Code for Construction Work ", Oregon
' State Employment Act Safety Requirements, and Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
requirements, as applicable, apply to Work specified herein.
' D. ASBESTOS FREE CERTIFICATION
Absolutely no materials containing asbestos are to be provided or installed as part of this Project.
The Contractor shall ensure that no subcontractor or any of Contractor's own forces installs any
materials containing asbestos. At final closeout of the Project, the Contractor shall provide to the
School District certification that no materials containing asbestos have been installed in the
Project and that the Project is asbestos free as required by the State of Oregon.
•
' E. SUPERVISION
The Contractor shall keep a competent and qualified Superintendent, with at least 10
years of construction supervision experience, on site at all times during which the work
1 of this contract is being performed. The Superintendent shall be familiar in all aspects of
the project and the contract documents and will be responsible for the supervision of the
work and its completion in a manner consistent with the terms of this agreement.
i
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL PHASE III CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 01010 -1
Printed 3 205
SECTION 01010
•
•
SUMMARY OF THE WORK
•
•
•
1.03 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
•
A. Work Sequence ,
Perform Work in manner required to accommodate the District's use of premises during the
Contract Period. Coordinate Work schedules and operations with the District's use requirements.
•
B. Limitations on Use
• 1. Owner intends to occupy and conduct school in the existing building during portions of
the construction period. The existing building during Owner occupancy is a limited
•
• Contractor access area. Contractor shall coordinate access to the existing building.
2. Complete and exclusive use of the construction area except as outlined above will be
permitted from Notice to Proceed with the Addition until Substantial Completion of the
• Additions. Contractor to coordinate areas available for excavation with Owner.
3. During the Owner's occupancy there may be days (Down Days) during the Contract
Period when occupied areas will be closed. Contractor shall request from the District a
list of Down Days that may occur during the Contract Period.. Contractor shall notify the
District at least 48 hours in advance of Down Days during which time the Contractor
intends to work. The District will pay for custodians' time during such Down Days when
the building is required to be open for the Contractor's use.
C. Non - interference with School
Perform work upon are adjacent to existing Owner occupied structures, insuch manner as to not
interfere with continued free and comfortable use of structures.
During normal school hours, keep building exits safe, protected, restricted from rest of
construction site and clear of obstructions at all times. If closure of an exit is required by the
Work, notify the Principal and allow ample time for an alternate plan to be executed.
Work shall not be performed in Owner occupied area and similar spaces during normal school
hours when such spaces are required for school purposes. Such Work shall be performed after
normal school hours up to 10:00 p.m. if no night time school activities are planned, or during
weekends and vacation periods when school is normally closed. All Work required to be planned
• in spaces being utilized for school purposes must be closely scheduled with the District so that
such spaces may be safely reused when classes resume.
D. Noninterference With Serving Utilities
Do not interrupt electric, gas, water or other services to existing Owner occupied structures
without prior notice to the District and then only at a definite time and for a definite duration
• approved by the District.
Contractor shall schedule demolition, remodel and new construction to accommodate Owner's
continued use of existing and/or new mechanical, plumbing, and electrical services as required for
Owner's continued occupancy and beneficial use of designated areas. ,
• Consult with public and private utility companies for location and extent of all utilities before
commencing Work. ,
Provide all services required. Protect and maintain existing utilities, active electrical conductors,
• sewers, pipes, and other active lines on school property or in street excavations.
Arrange for and pay cost of disconnecting, removing, relocating, capping, replacing, or
abandoning of public and private utilities in the way of construction operations in accordance with
serving utilities, local regulations and governing codes. Utilities, pipes, sewers, electrical 1
02054. TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 0 5 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 01010 -2
Printed 32.05
•
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF THE WORK •
I
conductors and the like to be abandoned shall be capped in accordance with instructions of
governing authority or as directed.
E. Protections .
Protect 'sidewalks, asphalt paving, concrete, shrubs and lawn areas at all times from spillage of
materials used in carrying out the Work. Exercise care to preclude materials from clogging catch
basins and yard drains. Leave all drainage items clean and in proper working condition.
Clean, repair, resurface or restore existing surfaces to their original condition, or completely
replace such surfaces to match existing, where damaged by construction operations.
I Whenever it is necessary to cut and remove fences and /or power lines (whether on private or
public property), restore such demolished work to condition at least equal to that which existed
• prior to such demolition.
Damage to property adjacent to District's property shall be restored to the satisfaction of
I respective property owners.
F. Removal of Equipment and Materials
Clear the Site and surrounding street areas of all equipment, apparatus, appliances, tools, unused
I materials and similar items as rapidly as they cease to be needed in carrying out the Work.
•
hi PI . 1.04 RELATED WORK BY OWNER OR OTHERS
A. NIC & FOIO Items: Items designated on the Drawings and /or described in the Project Manual as
"NIC" (Not in Contract) or "FOIO" (Furnished by Owner and installed by Owner) are not
I included in the Contract.
B. Contractor's Responsibilities:
1. Designate delivery date for each portion of the Work in the Progress Schedule. (If
appropriate.)
2. Storage of products if requested.
3. Coordinate installation with the Progress Schedule.
I 4. Provide all preparatory work necessary for proper installation including blocking and
backing and finish work including caulking, grouting, furring, preparation of subfloors
for finish flooring materials, and painting adjacent surfaces as .required for NIC
equipment.
C. Work of the Project which will be executed concurrently with the Work of this Contract, and
J Y
which is specifically excluded from this Contract:
I 1. Asbestos Abatement.
•
•
1.05 OWNER- FURNISHED PRODUCTS
I A. FOIC Equipment: Items designated on Project Drawings and /or described as "FOIC ", meaning
furnished by Owner, and installed by Contractor.
I B. Owner's Responsibilities for FOIC Equipment:
1. , Arrange for delivery of shop drawings, product data, samples, manufacturer's
instructions, and certificates to Contractor.
I 2. Deliver supplier's bill of materials to Architect for review. .
I 02054. TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 01010 -3
Primed 3 .2.05 •
•
•
SECTION 01010 •
SUMMARY OF THE WORK
3. Arrange and pay for delivery to site in accordance with Progress Schedule.
4. Inspect deliveries jointly with Contractor. I •
5. Submit claims for transportation damage.
6. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items.
7. Arrange for manufacturer's field services; arrange for and deliver manufacturer's
warranties and bonds to Contractor.
C. Contractor's Responsibilities:
1. Designate submittals and delivery date for each product in Progress Schedule.
2. Review shop drawings, product data, samples, and other submittals. Submit to Architect .
with notification of any observed discrepancies or problems anticipated due to non-
conformance with Contract Documents.
3. Receive and unload products at site.
4. Inspect deliveries jointly with Owner, record shortages, and damaged or defective items.
5. Handle products at site, including uncrating and storage. I
6. Protect products from damage, and from exposure to elements.
7. Assemble, install, connect, adjust, and finish products.
8. Provide installation inspections required by public authorities.
9. Repair or replace items damaged by Contractor.
D. Schedule of FOIC Equipment.
1. See individual listings in the Specifications Sections.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
- Not Used ,
END OF SECTION
•
•
I
I
I
02054. TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 0 5 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 01010 -4
Printed 3 2 '05
•
SECTION 01028
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
•
PART 1 GENERAL •
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Procedures for processing Change Orders. •
' 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. AIA Document A107 -1997.
B. Section 01025 - Applications for Payment.
' C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents.
•
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit name of the individual authorized to accept changes, and to be responsible for informing
others in Contractor's employ of changes in the Work.
B. Change Order Forms: AIA G701.
1.04 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM AND CONTRACT TIME
' • A. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material basis. •Provide full information
•
required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of changes in the Work.
B. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of
the quotation. •
C. On request, provide additional data to support computations:
1. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment.
2. Taxes, insurance and bonds.
' 3. Overhead and profit.
4. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
5. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.
' D. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time and material basis, with
additional information:
1. Origin and date of claim.
' 2. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom.
3. . Time records and wage rates paid.
4. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented.
' 1.05 CHANGE PROCEDURES
A. Architect may submit a Proposal Request which includes: Detailed description of a proposed
change with supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications, the projected time for
executing the change and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered
valid. Contractor will prepare and submit a response within 14 days.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 01028 -1
Printed 32 05
I.
1
•
SECTION 0 028
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
1
B. Contractor may initiate a change by submittal of a request to Architect describing the proposed
change with a statement of the reason for the change, the effect on Contract Sum and Contract
Time with full documentation: Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section
01600.
1.06 . CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION
A. Architect may issue a directive, signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed with a change
in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
•
B. Directive will describe changes in the Work, and will designate method of determining any
change -in Contract Sum or Contract Time.
•
C. Promptly execute the change in Work.
1.07 FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER
A. . Will be based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request
for Change Order as approved by Architect.
1.08 . UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER
•
A. For pre - determined unit prices and quantities, Change Order will be executed on a fixed price
basis.
B. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not predetermined, execute. Work under a
construction change authorization. Changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time will be computed
as specified for time and material Change Order. ,
1.09 TIME AND MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER
A. Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits in
Conditions of the Contract. . .
B. Architect will determine the change allowable in Contract Sum and Contract Time as provided in
Conditions of the Contract.
C. Maintain detailed records of work done on time and material basis.
• 1.10 EXECUTION OF CHANGE ORDERS .-
A. Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of the
111
Contract.
1.11 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
1
A. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized
Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum as shown on Change Order.
02054. TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS ,
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 01028 -2
Printed 3 2 05
•
• SECTION 01028
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
B. Promptly revise Progress Schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub - schedules
' to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit.
C. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
' Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
' Not Used.
•
END OF SECTION
1
i
1
I . .
1
1
1
' 02054 . TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL PHASE HI _ CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23.1 01028 -3
Printed 3:2.05
1 .
•
•
SECTION 01045
CUTTING AND PATCHING
I .
.
•
PART 1 GENERAL
1 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work.
I 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
•
A. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Substitutions.
' B. Individual Specifications Sections:
Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section.
I L
2. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those Sections.
3. Limitations on cutting structural members.
1.03 SUBMITTALS .
A. • Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. .
I 2. Integrity of weather- exposed or moisture- resistant element. ,
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
. 4. Visual qualities of sight- exposed elements.
1 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor.
iii B. Include in request:
PPI 1. Identification of Project.
2. Location and description of affected work.
3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. .
4. Description of proposed work, and products to be used.
5. Alternatives to cutting and patching.
6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor.
7. Written permission of affected separate contractor.
I 8. Date and time work will be executed. •
1 PART 2 PRODUCTS '
2.01 MATERIALS
.A. Those required for original installation.
I B. For any change in materials, submit request for substitution under provisions of Section 01600.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
I A. Execute cutting, fitting, patching and finishing including excavation and fill, to complete Work,
and to:
I 02054. TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 01045 -1
Pnntcd 3205 •
SECTION 01045
CUTTING AND PATCHING
i
1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other work.
2. Uncover work to install ill -timed work.
3. Remove and replace defective and non - conforming work.
4. Remove samples of installed work for testing.
•
5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical
work.
• 6. Provide finished appearance of surfaces and to match adjacent surfaces (unless otherwise
noted) affected by the Work.
3.02 INSPECTION '
A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and
• patching.
•
B. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. .
C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. . Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; devices and methods to protect
other portions of Project from damage.
B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work; maintain
excavations free,of water.
3.04 PERFORMANCE
A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide proper surfaces
to receive patching and finishing.
B. Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather - exposed and moisture-
resistant elements, and sight- exposed surfaces.
C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior
approval. i
D. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
E. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. 1
F. At penetrations of fire -rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire-
rated material, full thickness of the construction element. I
G. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest
intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. '
END OF SECTION
02054. TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III - CE2 /TRANSITIONS '
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 01045 -2
Printed 4205
•
•
SECTION 02072
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
I Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Remove portions of existing structure including concrete walls.
B. Remove designated building equipment and fixtures.
C. Saw -cut and remove portions of concrete floor slab for utilities work.
D. Remove designated partitions and components.
E. Remove existing roofing, flashings, cap metal, and selected areas of plywood roof deck.
F. Remove designated finish materials as required for new finishes.
G.' Provide temporary partitions to protect existing building.
I • H. Cap and identify utilities.
Pi 1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Precautions concerning asbestos and related work by District.
B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Project record documents.
C. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities: Fences and Barricades.
D. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities: Protection of existing buildings.
E. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities: Cleaning during construction.
' F. Division 15 - Mechanical: Coordination of demolition work.
' G. Division 16 - Electrical: Coordination of demolition work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
' A. Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Permits and notices authorizing demolition.
C. Certificates of severance of utility services.
' D. Permit for transport and disposal of debris.
E. Submit record drawings under provisions of Section 01300.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 02072-1
Primed 5 2.05 -
•
SECTION 02072
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
•
i
1.05 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building areas. Maintain protected ,
egress and access at all times.
B. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. '
C. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, and capping utility services within areas of
demolition. Disconnect and stub off.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Provide bracing and shoring as needed.
B. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.
•
C. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, fumes and smoke, to other parts
• of the existing building. •
•
D. Protect existing items which are not indicated to be altered.
E. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify utility, indicate capping locations and distance
from finish floor on Project Record Documents.
F. The Owner will within seven days notice from Contractor transfer any undesignated and
freestanding furnishings and equipment out of the Work area.
3.02 EXECUTION
A. Noise Control: Maintain a reasonable degree of quietness throughout progress of the Work so as
to not disturb classes in session in adjoining rooms or buildings or annoy residents of the
neighborhood. Rotary machines and tools must operate below OSHA noise and fume standards.
Concrete sawing and jackhammering shall be performed after regular school hours up to 9:00 p.m.
B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Provide temporary structural support where walls are
to be removed.
C. Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished materials from site.
D. Items requiring demolition and removal include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Roofing and roof metal.
2. Portions of structural assemblies.
3. Portions of interior concrete slabs.
4. Interior walls (plaster and gyp board).
5. Doors and Frames.
6. Plaster and gypsum board ceilings.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 02072 -2
Printed 3 2.05
•
I • SECTION 02072
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
I .
7. Casework and lockers.
I 8. Flooring Finishes. (Materials containing asbestos to be removed by District.).
9. Selected mechanical equipment and ductwork.
10. Selected electrical equipment.
I E. Remove materials to be re- installed or retained in manner to prevent damage. Store and protect
under provisions of Section 01600.
•
I .
F. Demolition Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to assist the Contractor in establishing
the general scope of work. Include all demolition work required to complete the project whether
or not specifically shown on demolition Drawings.
I G. Remove and promptly properly dispose of contaminated, infested, or dangerous materials
encountered.
I H. The Contractor shall employ a demolition foreman knowledgeable in identification of asbestos • containing materials and shall instruct workmen at the Site to be on the look -out for materials that
may contain asbestos fibers and to not disturb or attempt to remove such materials.
I. The Contractor shall carefully demolish walls, ceilings, etc., which contain concealed space to
allow visual inspection for any material which may be suspect of containing asbestos fibers prior
I to total scheduled demolition.
J. Should the Contractor discover any material which he suspects of containing asbestos fibers, the
Contractor shall stop working immediately and shall not carry on any activities in that area that
could disturb such materials. The School District will evaluate the circumstances and instruct the
0 • •
Contractor on how and when to proceed with the Work.
I K. The Contractor shall take every precaution possible to prevent the spread of asbestos fibers
throughout the Work under this Contract. The Contractor shall not break up and attempt to
. remove or actually remove from the Work area any material . suspected of containing asbestos
fibers (i.e., pipe insulation, sprayed -on fireproofing).
I - L. Asbestos fibers carried around the Work area or into the existing structure due to the Contractor's
carelessness or failure to follow the procedures specified herein shall, at the Contractor's expense,
I be cleaned up in accordance with E.P.A. requirements.
•
M. Do not burn or bury materials on site.
I N. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon completion of work, leave
areas of work in clean condition.
I END OF SECTION .
I _ .
I
I
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 02072 -3
Printed 3.205
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
Division 1- General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES •
A. Finish carpentry items, other than shop prefabricated casework. .
1 B. Standing and Running Trim.
C. . Hardware and attachment accessories.
D. Fiberboard and Plastic Laminate Wainscot.
E. Mounting of projection screens. •
1.03 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 05500- Metal Fabrications: Supply of stainless steel corncrguards to this Section.
' B. Section 08700 - Door Hardware: Supply of hardware and attachment accessories to this Section.
0, C. Section 10522 - Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories: Installation of fire extinguisher
cabinets.
D. Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories: Installation of accessories.
I .
E. Section 11130 — Audio /Visual Equipment: Installation of projection screens.
1.04 RELATED SECTIONS
• A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Installation of blocking for finish carpentry items.
B. Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinetwork.
' C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant used at the junction of different materials.
D. Section 08700 - Door Hardware: Repair of existing doors receiving new hardware,
' . E. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items.
1.05 REFERENCES
' A. AWI - Quality Standards.
B. FS MMM -A -130 - Adhesive, Contact.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
' MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06200 -1
P inted 3:22005
• SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
1
C. NEMA LD -3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. ,
D. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
E. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA) Manual. t
g g � )
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame /fuel /smoke requirements.
B. Conform to UL requirements to achieve fire resistance assembly rating indicated.
1.07 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Provide field samples under Section 01300.
B. Plastic Laminate.
C. Fiberboard Wainscot.
D. Locate where directed.
1.08 SUBMITTALS •
A. Submit samples under provisions of.Section 01300.
B. Submit two plastic laminate samples 2" x 3" in size illustrating manufacturer's full range of colors
and textures.
C. Deliver samples to painting sub - contractor for finishing of field samples prior submittal to
Architect.
1. Submit two samples of each type of hardwood material of adequate size to show wood
grain. Minimum 18 inches long.
2. Submit two samples of hardboard wainscot minimum 24- inches square. '
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. ,
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
C. Store materials in ventilated, interior locations under constant minimum temperatures of
60 degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 55 percent.
1
I
020334 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06200 -2
Printed 3 .2 2005
•
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 • LUMBER MATERIALS
Hardwood Lumber: PS 20; custom grade in accordance with AWI; Select Golden Oak; mixed
I A.
grain.
2.02 SHEET MATERIALS
t A. Colored Medium Density Fiberboard (WSCT -1):
1. Per AWI custom, premium grade board; sanded faces, 18 millimeter thick. Class C fire
rating.
2. Color: Refer to Section 09001 — Interior Finish Legend.
3. Acceptable Manufacturer: Avon Plywood Ltd. "Valchromat ". Distributed by DPI —
(800) 994 - 6899.
�. B. Softwood Plywood: PS -1, APA, Veneer A -C, exterior, with plastic laminate backing sheet
applied, 3/8" thickness; for wainscot backing board in wet locations such as janitor rooms and
toilets.
C. . Plastic Laminate: 0.050 General Purpose Grade: color and finish as selected by Architect from
I manufacturer's full line; for use at all window sills.
D. Plastic Laminate: 0.030 Type II Vertical Grade (WSCT -2): color and finish as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full line; for use at all wainscot areas scheduled to receive plastic
laminate.
E. Acceptable Moldings: PVC moldings by Kemlite or Marlite.
2.03 ADHESIVE .
111 A. Contact Adhesives: FS MMM -A -130 as recommended by manufacturer for type of application.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. . Nails: Size and type to suit application, plain finish.
B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Blind Fasteners, Lags, and Screws: Size and type to suit application; plain
I finish.
C. Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: Softwood lumber of Douglas fir species.
1 D. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type.
E. Wood Filler: Solvent oil base, tinted to match surface finish color.
F. Grout: Non - shrink as specified under Section 03600 — Grout.
' G. Silicone Rubber Sealant at WSCT -4: Super Silicone Sealant by Nudo Products or 732 by Dow
Corning.
H. Joint Sealants: As specified under Section 07900 — Joint Sealants.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06200-3
Primed 3 22005
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
1
I. Shelf Standards and Brackets: Single slotted, 14 gage steel standards with 14 gage steel brackets.
Knape and Vogt Model 85 by 72 inch long standards and 185 brackets.
J. Aluminum Trim at plastic laminate wainscot: Aluminum extrusions in clear anodized aluminum
finish, provide trim pieces at outside corners, inside corners and at all panel joints.
2.05 LUMBER SELECTION
A. Selection of lumber pieces:
1. Carefully select all members. Select.individual pieces so that obvious defects are not on
exposed surfaces and will not interfere with proper nailing or making connections.
2. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect, whether or not is has been installed, for .'
excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold, as well as for improper
• cutting and fitting.
3. Finger jointing of trim will not be acceptable and rejected by the Architect.
•
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION I
A. Insure proper backing is in place to accept.the work.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
•
3.02 • PREPARATION
A. Before installation,.prime paint surfaces with paint on items or assemblies to be in contact with
cementitious materials.
B. Colored Medium - density Fiberboard: ease all edges; route reveal pattern into material as shown
on drawings.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWI Custom quality standard. I
B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. -
C. Install trim with finish nails, blind nail when possible. I
D. Place sealant at the intersection of dissimilar materials.
E. Attach wainscot panels with approved adhesive, unless specified or detailed otherwise. Do not
face nail appearance grade materials.
•
F. Plastic Laminated Sills: Install window sills plumb, level, true, and straight as shown on
Drawings; set in full bed of adhesive. Brace in place and protect from movement. Scribe window
sills to fit where required by site conditions. '
3.04 TOLERANCES
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06200 -4 '
Printed 322005
•
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
•
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
' END OF SECTION
•
•
1
I
r
I
1
1
I
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06200 -5
Printed 3.2.2005
• SECTION 06410 •
CUSTOM CASEWORK '
.1
PART I GENERAL
1 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ,
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
I Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this. Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
I A. Specially fabricated plastic laminate finished cabinet units.
B. . Plastic laminate counter tops.
I C. Prepare for utilities.
M 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. • Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. .
I B. Section 07900— Joint Sealants: Sealants used in conjunction with dissimilar materials.
• Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures and Trim.
I C.
1.04 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 05500 — Metal Fabrications: Supply of countertop support brackets.
1.05 REFERENCES
I A. FS MMM -A -130 - Adhesive, Contact.
•
B. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. .
I C. . PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber. Standard. .
D. PS .58 - Basic Hardboard. '
E. AWI - Section 400 Custom Grade.
I F.- WIC - Woodwork Institute of California.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I A. Conform to AWI "Custom" grade and WIC "Manual of Millwork" for all work unless specified
otherwise herein.
B. Subcontractor Qualification: Subcontractor shall have been producing work, to quality specified
herein, for 5 years minimum and have proper equipment to produce work in accordance with AWI
standards.
i
I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06410 -1
Primed 0302 05
• SECTION 06410 •
CUSTOM CASEWORK -
•
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
•
B. Include materials, component profiles, fastening methods, assembly methods, joint details and I
accessory listings.
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. •
D. Exposed Hardware: Submit one sample of each type and finish.
E. Re- submit all shop drawings after field dimensions have been verified. Indicated on shop
1
drawings, dimensions which have been verified in the field.
1.08 MOCKUP
1
A. Provide full size base cabinet and upper cabinet in specified finish with hardware installed.
B. . Units will be examined to ascertain quality and conformity to standards.
C. Units will establish a minimum standard of quality for this work.
D. Approved units may be used as part of the Work.
1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. . Verify all measurements on shop drawings in the field. Update shop drawings and re- submit to
Architect. Indicate verified dimensions on shop drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS .
A. The following manufacturers are approved subject to conformance with specifications:
1. Kriegsco Manufacturing — (503) 981 -9083. �
2. Westmark Products, Inc. — (253) 531 -3470.
3. Lemon's Millwork— (541) 926 -1463.
4. ISEC Cabinets - (425) 489 -1441
5. Advance Cabinet Designs, Inc. — (541) 465 -3394.
6. Legend Custom Woodworking, Inc. - (503).669 -1000.
7. Burt-Sher, Inc. - (503) 681 -8446
8. Pacific Cabinets, Inc. — (208) 962 -5546
9. Ashland Glass and Millwork — (541) 664 -5557.
10. Specialty Enterprises — (503) 835 -6048.
11. Ritter Cabinet Manufacturing, Inc. — (360) 352 -3636.
12. TIM Systems Design Corporation (800) 456 -6716.
'I
.I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06410 -2
Printed 03.0205
SECTION 06410
CUSTOM CASEWORK
B. Substitutions under provisions of Section 01600. Substitution requests shall be accompanied by a
mock -up of a typical cabinet produced by the manufacturer showing quality of workmanship
normally produced by it. Mock -up shall include a door and drawer combination with related
hardware, counter top, and base meeting quality of cabinets specified herein.
•
2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Hardwood Lumber: Custom grade in accordance with AWI; Clear, Select White Maple. Moisture
content between 6 to 8 percent for stained finish.
2.03 SHEET MATERIALS
' • A. Wood Particleboard: Per AWI standard, Premium Grade board of balanced construction; sanded
faces, 45 lb. density per cubic foot with moisture content of 8% or less.
B. Hardwood Plywood (for exposed shelving): Seven ply premium grade plywood, exterior, Maple
veneer.
C. Polyester Laminated Plywood: Medium density overlay plywood, 1/2" thickness unless noted
otherwise.
D. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; APA Veneer grade A -D; exterior, 3/4 inch thickness.
E. Countertop and Casework Glazing:
. 1. Bi- passing doors - 1/4 inch clear tempered glass with ground pulls.
2. Shelves - 1/4 inch clear tempered glass with polished edges
3. Mirrors: Unframed Mirror Glass, quality q3, opaque alloy coating, '/ inch thick, smooth
and polished edges. Industry Standard - ASTM C1048. Sizes as shown on drawings.
2.04 ACCEPTABLE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS
A. Formica. •
B. Wilsonart.
C. Nevamar.
•
D. Pionite." -
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.05 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. Exposed portions of casework include all surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, and
the exposed interior surfaces of open'cases including top and bottom of shelves.
• B. Semi- exposed portions of casework include those members behind opaque doors, such as shelves,
division, interior faces of ends, case back, drawer sides, backs and bottoms, and the back face of
I doors.
C. Concealed portions of casework include sleepers, web frames, dust panels, and other surfaces not
usually visible after installation.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL PHASE III CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06410 -3
Primed 03 :02 05
SECTION 06410
CUSTOM CASEWORK
D. Exposed Surfaces: Plastic Laminate, NEMA Standard No. LD 1 -64 Type 1 General Purpose
Grade, thickness .050 inch for countertops, shelving, back and side splashes, provide metal
laminate at reveals indicated on drawings. Furnish Type 2 Vertical Grade 0.030 inch thickness,
for exposed face frames and ends and exposed faces of hinged doors and drawers for all
casework; solid color and pattern as selected by Architect.
E. Semi- Exposed Surfaces: Thermostat polyester or melamine resin - impregnated web, pressure
bonded and thermally fused to substrate; meeting the American Laminators Association (ALA)
performance standards for thermoset decorative panels - ALA 1988. Color as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's stock colors for all interior surfaces including shelves, backs, sides,
ends, bottoms, drawer sides and drawer bottoms.
F. Concealed Surfaces: Laminate backing sheet, LD -3 BK20 Backing grade, undecorated plastic
laminate.
•
2.06 . ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: FS MMM -A -130. Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application..
B. PVC Edge Facing: 3mm thick, impact resistant PVC, machine applied with hot -melt adhesive,
machine trimmed with corners rounded, color as selected by Architect. Acceptable manufacturer
Woodtape — 800 - 426 -6362.
C. PVC Edge Banding: Solid band, 0.02.0 mm thickness, smooth finish, of width to match sheet
thickness, pressure and heat melt adhesive applied, color to match plastic laminate.
D. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
E. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; black finish in ,I
exposed locations.
F. Cabinet Sink Supports: All metal supports, similar to Hamilton Industries' Model "52L752" or
approved; size as required.
2.10 HARDWARE
A. Provide manufacturer's standard, BHMA 626 finish over solid brass construction, unless
otherwise specified.
B. Five - Knuckle Hinges: Manufacturer's standard minimum 2'/2 inch high by 0.095 inch thick steel
fixed pin pivot hinge, powder coated in standard color. Rockford Process RPC 454 with hospital
tips. I
C. Magnetic Catches: Aluminum, 592 by Epco.
D. Drawer Front Adjusters: Blum #295.100. ,
E. Pulls: Ives #38 solid brass 4" wire pulls with dull chrome 626 (26D) finish, mounted with 2
screws fastened from back. •
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS .
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06410 -4
Printed 03 02 05
SECTION 06410
CUSTOM CASEWORK
•
I
F. Adjustable Shelf Supports at Semi - exposed shelving: Blum #340040 shelf support for line bored
application.
G. Adjustable Shelf Supports at exposed shelving: Knape & Vogt 256NP shelf support with 255
standard.
H. Glass Shelving Brackets w/ concealed standards: Felt covered metal brackets.
I I. Coat Hooks: Ives wardrobe hook #572 for wall mount or #580 for under shelf mounting. Dull
chrome finish.
I. J. Locks: Olympus Lock 100DR and 200DW masterkeyed as directed by Architect.
K. Sliding Glass Door Track: Stylemark Assembly #610187; #610165 at 3 door display case. .
I L. Sliding Glass Door Lock: Stylemark lock assembly #510247. .
M. • Elbow Catches: Steel, cadmium plated. Use on left -hand door of double door cases where locks
.I are indicated. Ives No. 2.
N. Drawer Slides: -
1. Standard Drawer Slides: Steel ball bearings, full extension, progressive action, nylon
rollers with recommended load rating of 100 lbs. minimum per pair.
2. File Drawer Slides: Steel ball bearings full extension, progressive action with load
capacity of 150 pounds minimum per par.
i . 3. Manufacturers: Accuride, Grass, Blum
O. Clothes Rods: Knape & Vogt KV -2 18" - 30" extension closet rod. Bright nickel plated. Provide
shelf mid support for spans, over 4 feet, 1195 by Knape & Vogt.
P. Cable Gromets:
Large Wire Access Grommets:
I l.
a) ABS plastic, two piece. assembly, 3 inch diameter hole, color as selected by.
Architect, XG Series by Doug Mochett and Company.
b) Quantity: As shown on drawings.
11 Q. Paper Slot Cover for Computer Desks: Plastiglide Co., 5/8" x 17 117" paper slot cover, made of
high- impact ABS Plastic.
1/ R. Castors for mobile casework: Jarvis and Jarvis, 5 inch diameter, 200 pound capacity #5 -305 -452
swivel caster or 5- 345 -452 rigid caster as shown on drawings.
I S. Articulated Keyboard Arm:
1. 25 inch wide adjustable articulated tray with non -skid pads and integrated dual mousing
surface on either side of platform; full length gel wrist rest; tilting and swivel tray option.
2. Quantity: As shown on drawings.
T. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.11 FABRICATION
A. Conform to AWI Section 400, Custom Grade with plastic laminate faces.
I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I , MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06410 -5
Printed 03 02 05
410 1
SECTION 06
CUSTOM CASEWORK
B. Cabinet Bodies: •
1. Fabricate wood casework to dimensions, profiles, and details shown. Provide reveal
overlay construction.
2. Assemble units in shop in as large components as possible to minimize field cutting and
jointing. Allow for easy handling and passage through building openings. Mortise and I
tenon, glue and screw joints for maximum strength using precision jigs and clamps to
insure square corners and plumb vertical surfaces.
3. Construct cabinets without integral base. Provide separate structural base as specified
• below.
• 4. Edge band exposed edges of plywood and particleboard panels, shelving, and door
fronts.
5. Provide minimum %2 inch thick cabinet back
C. Drawers:
1. Fronts: One piece 3/4" thick, particleboard or plywood with 3mm PVC edge facing on
all four sides.
2. Sides and front: 1/2" thick. polyester laminated plywood with "Lock Shoulder" joint and
glued to drawer front. Edge band top edges.
3. Back: 1/2" thick polyester laminated plywood let into sides. Edge band top edge.
4. Bottoms: 1/4" thick tempered hardboard set into 1/4" deep grooves at front, back and
both sides.
5. Drawer reinforcement: Reinforce drawer bottoms in excess of 400 sq. in. in area with 1"
x 3" wood strip running front to back centered on drawer.
6. Fabricate drawers full depth of cabinet.
7. Mount drawers on metal drawer guides.
8. Drawer depth to be a maximum total of 1 1/2 inches less than drawer front.
D. Semi - Exposed Shelving:
1. 3/4" thick less than 32 inches wide; 1" thick 32 inches wide or wider. Edge band
shelving. Set fixed shelving into 1/4" deep grooves in end panels and divider partitions.
2. Provide "Line bored" multi hole shelf support holes.
3. Allow 1/.16" clearance at each end of loose shelving (1/8" overall) for ease of moving
shelves.
4. Wrap front and top of music storage cabinets with carpet as indicated on Drawings.
5. At acrylic shelving ease edges and polish ends and exposed edges. Bend plastic as
shown on drawings.
E. Cabinet Doors: 3/4" thick particleboard with 3mm PVC edge facing on all edges.
F. Base Construction: Construct cabinet bases of 1/4" marine grade plywood, glued and Screwed,
provide reinforcing blocks as required for maximum strength. Recess base for toe space as
indicated. Set base on floor where casework is to be installed, level top surface and scribe bottom 1
surface to floor line leaving a height of 4" between floor and bottom of new casework supported
thereon.
G. Countertops: Plywood or particleboard top over wood framing. Particleboard is not allowed in _ 1
sink cabinets. Cover with plastic laminate including front edge. Provide butt joints between top
and backsplash. Provide flush hairline joints at all locations. Scribe countertops or backsplashes
to abutting wall surface for hairline joint.
r
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J. 06410 -6
Printed 0302.05
•
SECTION 06410
• CUSTOM CASEWORK
I
H. Filler Panels: Provide 3/4" filler panels covered with matching plastic laminate to fill in all voids
• between cabinets and walls.
I I. Backsplash/Chase Panels - Provide 3/4 inch Backsplash/Chase Panels covered with matching
plastic laminate to enclose chase between upper wall cabinets and base cabinet. Panel to extend to •
I the entire length of base cabinet and will return to all exposed ends. Coordinate with plumbing
and electrical installation of pipes, drains, electrical outlets etc.
J. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
K. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes.
Make corners and joints hairline. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut -outs. .
I L. Closet Shelving: Fixed or adjustable shelving as indicated on drawings. Finish exposed and
• semi- exposed surfaces with Low Pressure laminate; finish bottom, vertical and top edges with
I •
3mm PVC edge facing. Install mid - support bracket for shelves over 48 inches long
M. Exposed Shelving: 1 inch thick adjustable shelving as indicated on drawings. Finish exposed
vertical edges with 3mm PVC edge facing. At shelving for surface-mounted wall standards and
brackets provide a maximum shelf length of 64 inches or in sizes as indicated on drawings
N. Cable Trays: 4 inch wide by 3 inch high with fixed, finished ends mounted to metal support
II brackets. Fabricate from 3 /4 inch particleboard with plastic laminate finish.
10 PART 3 , EXECUTION •
3.01 INSPECTION
I A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. .
3.02 APPLICATION
• A. Finish for Exposed Hardwood: •
.1. Apply finish materials in accordance with the recommendations of the "Painting and
Decorating Contractors of America Manual" (PDCA).
I
2. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
• 3. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
4. Sand, as required, between coats to achieve required finish.
I
3.03. INSTALLATION OF CASEWORK
•
I. A. Prior to installation of casework locks turn all casework locks over to supplier of materials for
Section 08700 — Door Hardware for installation of cylinders in casework locks. Cylinders to be
installed in locks under the work defined by Section 08700 — Door Hardware. After installation of
1 cylinders, casework locks are to be installed in casework as a part of the work of this Section.
B. Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions: Shim as required, using concealed
shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8' -0" for plumb and level with 1/32" maximum offsets in
flush adjoining surfaces, and 1/16" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces. Where
casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Before making cutouts, drill
pilot holes at corners.
I
02054 • TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I • MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J - 06410 -7
Printed 03 02,05
SECTION 06410
CUSTOM CASEWORK
C. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or
binding. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other fixtures and
fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges. •
3.04 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS
• A. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent deflection.
Provide flush hairline joints in top units using clamping devices.
B. Provide holes and cutouts as required for mechanical and electrical service. 1
C. Mechanically fasten backsplash to countertops set in sealant.
D. Cap exposed plastic laminate counter edges with material of same finish and pattern.
• E. Scribe backsplash with walls as recommended by WIC. Caulk where backsplash abuts different
surface refer to Section 07900 - Joint Sealants.
F. After installation, carefully dress joints smooth, remove any surface scratches, clean and polish
entire surface.
G. Fasten countertop support brackets at locations shown on drawings, or at 48 inches on center
maximum under unsupported countertops. In corner applications provide two at each
‘4
unsupported corner, one support bracket perpendicular to each wall surface.
3.05 ANCHORAGE I
A. Secure cabinets, shelving, and countertops to grounds, furring and solid blocking with counter
• sunk fasteners and blind nailing. Anchor wall mounted cabinets with concealed continuous cleats
screwed to solid framing or blocking.
3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. • Repair or remove and replace defective Work as directed upon completion of installation.
B. Clean casework shelving, counters, hardware fittings and fixtures. I
C. Provide the protection of materials and installed casework from damage until acceptance of the.
Work by the Architect.
D. • Cover casework with 4 mil polyethylene film, for protection against soiling and deterioration
during construction work.
E. Do not permit use of casework for storage of construction equipment or as scaffolding surface for
construction operations.
• END OF SECTION 1
•
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06410 -8
Printed 01 02 05
SECTION 07213. •
BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION
I
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions.and
Division 1- General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES .
A. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces.
I B. Sound batt insulation for selected interior walls.
E03 REFERENCES
A. FS HH -I -521 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, for Ambient Temperatures).
B. FS HH -I -1252 - Insulation Thermal, Reflective (Aluminum Foil).
C. FS HH- I -1030A - Insulation Loose (glass or mineral).
D. ASTM C553 — Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation (Industrial Type).
E. ASTM C612 — Mineral Fiber Block and Board Insulation.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Materials of this Section shall provide a thermal, vapor and air barrier at building enclosure
elements and sound attenuation at interior elements. Vapor barrier shall be on warm side (winter)
of the insulation of walls. The vapor barrier shall have a perm rating of one or less.
1.05 SUBMITTALS .
A. Submit . product data and manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section
01300.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
I 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1 A. Owens - Corning Fiberglass.
B. Manville.
C. Certainteed
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL -PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07213 -1
Printed 3 2 05
SECTION 07213
BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION
•
•
2.02 • MATERIALS •
A. Glass or Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation:
1. Concealed Applications:
a. • FS HH -I -52.1; preformed glass or mineral fiber batt; Type I - without membrane
for sound insulation and insulation under acoustical ceilings. Type III - with
• reflective covering one side for exterior wall insulation.
•
b. Exterior walls - Contractors Option: Type I insulation without membrane and
separate Vapor Retarder; Lamotite 2835M Foil/Scrim /Kraft Lamotite.
2. Thickness required for resistance (R) values as shown.
2.03 INSULATION VALUES
A. Exterior Walls: R -19. •
B. Sound and Acoustic Batts: Batts to completely fill wall cavity - see wall types on drawings.
2.04 ACCESSORIES •
A. Tape: Bright aluminum, self adhering type mesh-reinforced 2 inches wide.
B. Nails, Staples and Steel Wire: Electroplated; type and size to suit application. 1.
PART 3 EXECUTION •
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation.
B. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested. I
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Concealed Applications — Exterior Walls:
• 1: Tightly pack insulation into shim spaces at perimeter of windows and doors.
B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage. I
• C. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within
the plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids. •
D. Install sound batt insulation with tight fit between studs in locations as noted on Drawings - see
wall types for insulation thickness. Sound batts must - completely fill wall cavity. Secure batts
above finished wall spaces and attic areas, where no gypsum board is specified, with steel wire
run horizontally at a maximum spacing of 24 inches on center. Staple wire in place at each stud.
END OF SECTION
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS ;,
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07213 -2
Printed 3 2 .05
•
SECTION 07270
FIRESTOPPING
I
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general, provisions of the contract, including General and other Conditions and
Division 1- General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
•
A. Applications of firestop systems include: •
1. Penetrations for passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping electrical busways and
raceways through fire rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal beams
(floor /ceiling assemblies) and vertical service shaft walls and. partitions.
2. Openings between structurally separate sections of walls and floors.
3. Gaps between tops of walls and ceiling or roof assemblies. _
4. Expansion joints in fire rated walls and floors..
• 5. Openings and penetrations in fire rated partitions or walls containing fire doors.
6. Openings around structural members which penetrate fire rated floors or walls.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
•
A. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching: Cutting and patching of concrete or masonry for pipe and
conduit penetrations.
•
B. Section 07250 - Fireproofing: Spray -on fireproof coating on structural steel.
C. Divisions 3, 4, 5, and 9: Firestopping of penetrations.
D. Division 15: Mechanical.
E. Division 16: Electrical.
1.04 REFERENCES . •
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): .
1. ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2. ASTM E 119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
3. ASTM E 814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through - Penetration Firestops.
B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Building Materials Directory:
1. UL 1479 Fire Tests of Through- Penetrations Firestops.
2. UL 2079 Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint systems.
3. . UL Fire Resistance Directory:
a. Fills, Voids or Cavity Materials (XI -IHW)
b. Firestop Devices (XHJI)
C. Basic/National Building Code.
D. Uniform Building Code, with current Oregon Amendments.
' E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
2. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07270 -1
Primed 32;05
•
SECTION 07270
FIRESTOPPING
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Provide firestop systems which have been manufactured and
installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or
failure.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 1300.
B. Product Data:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product
components. Include UL Systems or other independent laboratory system classification
•
number on shop drawings.
4. Certification from sealant manufacturers that their products are suitable for the use
indicated and comply with specification requirements.
C. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's standard details, surface preparation, and
installation instructions for firestopping assemblies.
D. Submit written documentionof qualifications listed below.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: •
• 1. Applicator shall have 3 years experience in the application of firestopping materials in
• similar projects.
2. Submit written documentation of applicator's qualifications, including reference projects
of similar scope and complexity, with current phone contacts of architects and owners for
verification.
3. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at
all times during installation.
B. Single source responsibility for firestopping materials:
1. Obtain firestop materials from single manufacturer for each different product required.
2. Manufacturer shall instruct applicator in procedures for each material.
C. Regulatory Requirements: •
1. Firestop System 'installation must meet requirements fo ASTM E -814, UL 1479 or UL
2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being r
penetrated.
2. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes
having local jurisdiction.
3. For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available
through any manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering judgement derived from similar
independently tested system designs will be submitted to local authorities having
• jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Manufacturer's engineer
judgement drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop
Council.
•
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS -•
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07270 -2
Printed 3• 05 -
•
SECTION 07270
FIRESTOPPING
r
r
r
r
1
I
Oil • •
1
I
I i..
1
I
1
r
,
r
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION I. REMODEL - PHASE III - CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07270 -3
Printed 1 : 2'05
•
•
1/
SECTION 07270 • FIRESTOPPING
I
. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: I
1.. Deliver firestopping materials in original unopened packages bearing the name of the
manufacturer.
2. Deliver firestopping materials with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Labels for fire
hazard and fire resistance classifications and with legible application instructions.
B. Storage and Protection:
1. Keep firestopping materials dry. .
2. Keep material off the ground, under cover, and away from damp surfaces.
C. Before handling, read product data sheets and material safety sheets. Do not use damaged or
expired materials. .
•
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Deliver to the Architect signed copies of the following written warranties against material failure:
. - 1. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering firestop materials.
2. Applicator's standard warranty covering workmanship. ,�
PART 2 PRODUCTS
• It
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
. 4
. A. .. Tremco, Inc. (Basis for specification)
B. Bio Fireshield.
C. RectorSeal Metacaulk.
D. Nelson Firestop. I
E. Firestop Systems, Inc.
F. Substitute Manufacturers: I
1. Submit substitution requests prior to Bid Date.
2. Comply with requirements in Section 01600.
' , i
. 2.02 COMPONENTS
A. High Performance Intumescent Acrylic Sealant:
1. • One part, graphite- based.
2. Water- based, paintable
3. Testing: ASTM E814 and UL 1479.
MA
4. Product: TREMstop IA
B. Flexible Acrylic Sealant:
1. Single component. a
2. Gunnable or sprayable to suit application.
3. Water- based, paintable.
4. Movement Capability: +/- 33 percent. -
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07270. -4
Printed 3.2,05
SECTION 07270
FIRESTOPPING
I . .
•
5. Fire rating: Up to 3 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E84, ASTM E814, UL 1479, UL
2079.
6. Product: TREMstop Acrylic or TREMstop - SP.
I . C. Fire Resistant Silicone Sealant:
1. Single component:
2. Gunnable or Self- Leveling to suit application.
3. Neutral cure process.
4. Movement Capability: +/- 50 percent.
5. Fire rating: Up to 4 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E84, ASTM E814, ASTM E119, •
UL 1479.
. 6. Product: Fyre -Sil. Or Fyre -Sil S /L.
D. Flexible Intumescent Wrap Strips:
1: Graphite -based intumescent.
I 2. Flexible fiberglass webbing laminate.
3. Expansion rate: 12:1.
4. . Testing: ASTM E814, UL 1479.
I 5. Product: TREMstop WS .
E. Pre - manufactured Intumescent Firestop Collar:
` • I. Graphite -based intumescent.
I 2. Sized for pipes 1 %2 to 12 inch diameter.
3. Tested for PVC, ABS, FRPP and CPVC piping systems.
0 .
4. Fire rating: Up to 3 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E814, UL 1479.
5. Product: TREMstop D.
F. Pre - manufactured Cast -in -place Intumescent Device: •
1. Prefabricated device using Flexible intumescent Wrap Strips, includes cold smoke seal
neoprene gasket.
. I 2. Sized for pipes 1 '/2 to 12 inch diameter.
3. Standard heights: 4, 6 and 8 inch. •
4. Tested for PVC, ABS and CPVC piping systems.
5. Fire rating: Up to 3 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E814, UL 1479.
6. Product: Fyre -Can.
1 G. Pre- manufactured Intumescent Device for walls:
1. Prefabricated device using Flexible intumescent Wrap Strips.
2. Sized for pipes 1 %2 to 12 inch diameter.
3. Standard lengths: 8 and 12 inch.
4. Tested for PVC, ABS and CPVC piping systems.
5. Fire rating: Up to 2 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E814, UL 1479.
I 6. Product: Fyre -Can Sleeve.
H. Durable Intumescent Firestop Pillows:
1. Moisture resistant fiberglass bag with intumescent material.
2. Fire rating: Up to 2 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E814, UL 1479.
3. Product: TREMstop PS.
II. Trowelable Firestop Mortar: : .
1. Hydraulic, fire resistant cementitious compound.
2. Asbestos Free
3. Fire rating: Up to 3 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E814, UL 1479.
I 4. Product: TREMstop M
•
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III - CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07270 -5
. Printed 3 2 05
•
SECTION 07270
FIRESTOPPING
J. Fire Resistant Ceramic -Based Sealant:
1. Single component, non -sag, ceramic based sealant. I
2. Testing: ASTM E84, ASTM E814, UL 1479.
• 3. Product: Fyre - Shield.
•
K. Flexible Metal Restricting Collar for Wrap Strips:
• 1. Prefabricated device using Flexible intumescent Wrap Strips.
2. .Sized for pipes 1 '/2 to 12 inch diameter.
3. Tested for PVC, ABS, FRPP•and CPVC piping systems.
4. Fire rating: Up to 3 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E814, UL 1479.
5. Testing: ASTM E814, UL 1479.
6. Product: TREMstop MCR. I
L. Multi - Component Polyurethane Sealant:
1. Non sag, multi- component, polyurethane sealant.
2. Movement Capability: +/- 50 percent.
3. Product: Dymeric 511 or Vulkem 922.
M. Ceramic Fiber Insulation:
1. Pure ceramic fibers.
• 2. Contains no binder or organic materials. Contains no corrosion- promoting agents.
3. Resists fungus and mildew.
4. Density: 6 to 8 pounds per cubic foot.
5. Melting Point: 3,200 degrees Fahrenheit.
6. Product: Cerablanket F.S.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required, for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor and approved by the sealant manufacturer as 1
compatible.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL I
A. Obtain firestop system products from a single manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner's request, provide manufacturer's field services
consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product
• installation in accordance with manfuacturer's instructions.
C. Testing: Comply with requirements of UL Fire Resistance Directory: Fill, Void or Cavity
Materials (XHHW) and Firestop Devices (XHJI)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions:
1. Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections,
are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify
conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion.
3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07270 -6
Printed 3 :2.05
SECTION 07270
FIRESTOPPING
I
3.02 PREPARATION
,1 A. Surface Preparation: Prepare surface to receive firestop system products in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions for surface preparation.
1. Verify that penetrations and joints are properly sized.
2. Comply with manufacturer's instructions relative to temperature and humidity
conditions, before, during and after installation of firestopping materials.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with published "Through-
"! Penetration Firestop Systems" in Underwriter Laboratorie's Fire Resistance Directory or the
II publication of another approved independent laboratory.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of
I
firestopping materials.
1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal.
2. Seal all joints to ensure an air and water resistant seal, capable to withstand compression
and extension due to thermal, wind or seismic joint movement.
3. Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager prior to installation of UL firestop
systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
IIII A. Examine sealed penetration and joint areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or
enclosing areas.
B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.
I C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating
of existing firestop system already installed by other trades.
i
3.05 COMPLETION •
•
A. Adjusting Defective Work:
1 1. Examine penetration firestopping assemblies.
2. Add additional firestopping materials where required for tight seal.
B. Cleaning:
1. Remove excess firestopping insulation materials.
I 2. Remove excess firestopping mortar and caulk from exposed surfaces.
III END OF SECTION
•
I
I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07270 -7
Primed 3 205
•
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALANTS
I .
PART 1GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
1 other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section..
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
1 A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces.
B. Sealant and backing. .
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
I A. Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System: Sealants at expansion joints.
B. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Sealant used at junction of different materials.
I C. Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Sealants used in conjunction with countertops.
D. Section 07270 — Firestopping: Sealants used in conjunction with firestopping.
E. Section 08110 - Steel Doors & Frames: Sealants used in conjunction with door frames
01 F. Section 08410 — Aluminum Entrances and Storefront: Sealants used in conjunction with
Aluminum Framing Materials.
G. Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants used in conjunction with glazing methods.
H. Section 09260 — Gypsum Board Systems: Sealants used in conjunction with dissimilar materials
and preparation for painting.
I. Section 09311 — Ceramic Tile Floor Finish: Sealants used in conjunction with dissimilar
materials.'
I J. Section 09312 — Ceramic Tile Wall Finish: Sealants used in conjunction with dissimilar materials.
K.' Division 15 - Mechanical: Sealants used in conjunction with louvers and duct penetration.
I 1.04 SUBMITTALS .
I A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product data: •
- Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
I I.
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements;
3. Shop Drawings or catalog illustrations in sufficient detail to show installation and . .
I interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades;
4. Manufacturer's current recommended installation procedures which, when approved by
the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation
procedures used on the Work.
•
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07900 -1
Printed 03; 0205
SECTION 07900
I
JOINT SEALANTS
5. Written documentation of applicator's qualifications, including reference projects of
similar scope and complexity, with current phone contacts of architects and owners for
verification.
6. Certification from sealant manufacturers that their products are suitable for the use
indicated and comply with specification requirements.
7. Report from sealant applicator summarizing results of preconstruction field adhesion
testing.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE .
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary
crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper
performance of the work of this Section.
• B. Applicator qualifications:
1. Applicator shall have at least three years experience in installing materials of types
• • specified and shall have successfully completed at least three projects of similar scope
and complexity. •
2. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at
all times during installation.
C. Perform work in accord with ASTM C -1193. guidelines except where more stringent requirements
are indicated or specified.
• D. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion testing:
1. Submit to joint sealant manufacturer samples of actual materials that will contact or
4
affect their joint sealants in the Work for compatibility and adhesion testing.
2. This testing will not be required where sealant manufacturer is able to furnish data
acceptable to Architect based on previous testing for adhesion and compatibility to
• materials matching those of the Work.
I
E. Preconstruction field adhesion testing:
1. In jobsite field samples prior to general installation, conduct field -tests for adhesion of
joint sealants to actual joint substrates using proposed joint preparation methods
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Conduct tests for each type of sealant and substrate.
3.: Locate field -test joints where inconspicuous or as approved by Architect. .
4. Include areas typical of those requiring removal of existing sealants and utilize methods
proposed for sealant removal that have been pre- approved by Architect.
5. Test method: Use manufacturer's standard field adhesion test methods and methods
proposed for joint preparation to verify proper priming and joint preparation techniques
. required to obtain optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrate.
6. Evaluate and report results of field adhesion testing.
7. Do not use joint preparation methods or sealants that produce less than satisfactory
. adhesion to joint substrates during testing.
8. • Standard of acceptance: Joints installed during preconstruction field adhesion testing that
are accepted by Architect shall be retained as standard of acceptability and incorporated
into Work of that area during general installation.
9. At least one such standard of minimum 5 feet in length shall be established for each type
of sealant and substrate.
•
I
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 ' TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL D ISTRICT 23J 07900 -2
Printed 03 02 05
•
•
1 SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALANTS
F. Schedule applications of waterproofing, water repellents and preservative finishes after sealant
installation unless sealant manufacturer approves otherwise in writing. Ensure that installed
1 sealant is allowed to cure sufficiently prior to subsequent applications.
•
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1 A. Deliver the materials to the job site in the manufacturer's unopened containers with all labels intact
and legible at time of use. ' .
•
1 ,
B. Store materials in accord with manufacturer's recommendations with proper precautions to.ensure
fitness of material when installed.
C. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
1.07 SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS
1 A. General: •
1. Provide joints properly dimensioned to receive the approved sealant system.
2. Provide joint surfaces that are clean, dry, sound and free of voids; deformations,
1 . protrusions and contaminants which may inhibit application or performance of the joint
sealant.
3. Where expansion joints having preformed joint fillers are scheduled to be sealed, provide
a reservoir to accept the sealant such as by a molded breakaway joint cap or a removable
I
block out.
01 . 1.08 WARRANTY
A. Deliver to the Architect signed copies of the following written warranties against adhesive and
cohesive failure of the sealant and against infiltration of water and air through the sealed joint for
I _ a period of 3 years from date of completion.
1. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering sealant materials;
2. Applicator's standard warranty covering workmanship.
1 .
PART 2 PRODUCTS -
2.01 GENERAL -
A. Acceptable manufacturer:
1. Tremco /Vulkem by Mameco International, Inc., Cleveland, OH 1- 800 - 321 -6412.
2. Sika
3. Precora
I B. Provide all sealants from one manufacturer to insure compatibility.
C. Compatibility: .
- 1. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers and accessory joint materials that are compatible with
one another and with joint substrates under project conditions.
2. Install joint sealants, joint fillers and related joint materials that are nonstaining to visible
joint surfaces and surrounding substrate surfaces.
I D. Provide colors selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range.
I
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07900 -3
Printed 03.02.05
•
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALANTS
2.02 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
•
A. Sealant Type A:
1. For exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non - traffic horizontal surfaces such as, but not
limited to:
•
a. Control and expansion joints in cast -in -place concrete.
b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
c. Joints between different materials listed above.
•
d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above frames of doors, windows, •
• storefronts, louvers and similar openings.
e. Under metal thresholds and saddles.
f. Bedding bead for sheet metal flashings and frames of metal or wood.
g. Between laps in fabrications of sheet metal.
h. Other joints as indicated. .
2. Provide single- component or multi - component, low- modulus, non -sag polyurethane
sealant that is suitable for continuous immersion in water; comply with ASTM C920,
Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25. ■
B. Sealant Type B: ■
1. For interior joints in vertical surfaces and non - traffic horizontal surfaces such as, but not
•
limited to:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior openings.
c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,
windows, storefronts, louvers, elevator entrances and similar openings.
d. Trim or finish joints subject to movement.
•
•
e. Between laps in fabrications of sheet metal.
f. Other joints as indicated.
2. Provide single- component or multi- component, non -sag polyurethane sealant having
plus- or -minus 25 percent joint movement capability that is suitable for continuous
immersion in water; comply with ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25.
C. Sealant Type C:
1. For exterior and interior joints in horizontal and sloped traffic surfaces such as, but not
limited to:
a. Control, expansion and isolation joints in cast -in -place concrete.
b. Tile control and expansion joints.
c. Joints between different materials listed above.
d. Other joints as indicated.
2. Provide single- component or multi- component polyurethane sealant having a Shore A
hardness of not less than 25 or more than 50 and plus -or -minus 25 percent joint
movement capability that is suitable for continuous immersion in water; comply with
ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P or NS, Class 25.
D. Sealant Type D: •
1. For exterior and interior joints in vertical surfaces and non - traffic horizontal surfaces
. requiring a virtually odor free sealant.
2. Provide single- component, no vapor, low - modulus, 100 percent solids polyurethane
sealant that is suitable for continuous immersion in water; comply with ASTM C920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
3. Provide sealant comperable to Vulkem 921; Mameco International, Inc. I
E. Sealant Type E: I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07900 -4
Printed 03'02 05 -
•
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALANTS
I i joints horizontal and sloped surfaces up to 6 percent requiring
I
I. For exterior and inter or Joi is m ho p p p q g
a virtually odor free sealant.
I 2. Provide single- component, no vapor, low - modulus, 100 percent solids polyurethane
sealant that is suitable for continuous immersion in water. ASTM C920, Type S, Grade
P, Class 25.
3.. Provide sealant comperable Vulkem 300SSL; Mameco International, Inc.
F. Sealant Type F:
1. For interior joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces requiring pick- resistant security _
1 sealant such as, but not limited to:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior openings.
1 c. Perimeter joints between concrete surfaces and frames of interior doors,
windows and elevator entrances.
d. . Trim or finish joints subject to minimal movement.
I e. Other joints as indicated.
2. Provide single- component or multi- component, non -sag polyurethane sealant having a
Shore A hardness of 55 minimum.
3. Provide sealant comparable to Vulkem 617; Mameco International, Inc.
,1. G. Sealant Type G:
1. For applications at acoustical walls in exposed locations around doors, windows and
I concealed spaces at the intersection of a continuous metal track and concrete floor
2. Acoustical Butyl Rubber Calking, ASTM C919, Non -sag, one component
3. Provide sealant comperable to USG Acoustical Sealant as manufactured by U.S.
01 Gypsum.
H. Sealant Type H: . .
1. For applications in concealed spaces, such as under continuous metal track and concrete.
I 2. floor. ,
Acoustical Tape Sealant: Medium density Polyvinyl chloride Foam Tape Sealants: SST
15, Sealant Specialist Tape by Tremco.
I. Sealant Type J: .
1. For applications such as under thresholds.
2. Calking: US. TT -S- 001657, Type I, with +/- 5 percent joint movement range, single
• I componant.
J. Sealant Type K:
1. For applications around interior doors and windows, casework and backsplashes.
I 2. Water Based Acrylic Latex Sealant: ASTM C834. Single component, fast setting with
minimal shrinkage. .
I K. Sealant Type L:
1. For applications at exposed interior prefinished locations
2. At restrooms, mop sink and classroom sinks provide fungus resistant properties.
I 3. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Type S, Class 25.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Joint cleaner: Cleaner as recommended by sealant manufacturer for substrates indicated.
1
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07900 -5
Primed 03 05
•
SECTION 07900
1
JOINT SEALANTS
•
B. Joint primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for substrates, conditions and exposures
indicated.
C. Bond breaker: Polyethylene tape or other adhesive faced tape as recommended by sealant
manufacturer to prevent sealant contact where it would be detrimental to sealant performance.
D. Joint backer: Polyethylene, closed cell, foam rod or other compatible non - waxing, non - extruding,
non- staining resilient material in dimension 25 percent to 50 percent wider than joint width as
. recommended by sealant manufacturer for conditions and exposures indicated.
E. Masking tape: Non- staining, non- absorbent tape product compatible with joint sealants and
adjacent joint surfaces that is suitable for masking.
2.04 OTHER MATERIALS .1
•
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor and approved by the sealant manufacturer as
compatible, subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
. 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of
those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
B; Applicator shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed.
1. Verify conformance with manufacturer's requirements;
2. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Architect;
3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces to receive sealants in accord with sealant manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Thoroughly clean joint surfaces using cleaners approved by sealant manufacturer whether primers
are required or not.
1. Remove all traces of previous sealant and joint backer by mechanical methods, such as
by cutting, grinding and wire brushing, in manner not damaging to surrounding surfaces.
2. Remove paints from joint surfaces except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer.
3. Remove wax, oil, grease, dirt film residues, temporary protective coatings and other
residues by wiping with cleaner recommended for that purpose. Use clean, white, lint-
free cloths and change cloths frequently.
4. Remove dust by blowing clean with oil =free, compressed air.
C. Provide joint backer material uniformly to depth required by sealant manufacturer for proper joint
design using a blunt instrument.
1. Fit securely by compressing backer material 25 percent to 50 percent so no displacement
occurs during tooling.
2. Avoid stretching or twisting joint backer.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07900 -6
Printed 03 0205
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALANTS
1111
D. Provide bond - breaker where indicated or recommended by sealant manufacturer, adhering strictly
to the manufacturers installation requirements. .
E. Prime joint substrates where required.
1. Use and apply primer according to sealant manufacturers recommendations.
2. Confine primers to sealant bond surfaces; do not allow spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces.
F. Taping:
1. Use masking tape where required to prevent sealant or primer contact with adjoining
surfaces that would be permanently stained or otherwise damaged by such contact or the
cleaning methods required for removal.
2. Apply tape so as not to shift readily and remove tape immediately after tooling without
disturbing joint seal.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Provide the approved sealant system where shown on the Drawings, and in strict accord with the
I manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect.
B. Install sealants immediately after joint preparation.
' C. Mix and apply multi- component sealants in accord with manufacturer's printed instructions.
D. Install sealants to fill joints completely from the back, without voids or entrapped air, using
proven techniques, proper nozzles and sufficient force that result in sealants directly contacting
and fully wetting joint surfaces.
E. Install sealants to uniform cross - sectional shapes with depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
• F. Tool sealants in manner that forces sealant against back of joint, ensures firm, full contact at joint
1 interfaces and leaves a finish that is smooth, uniform and free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets
and embedded impurities.
1. Dry tooling is preferred; tooling liquids that are non - staining, non - damaging to adjacent
surfaces and approved by sealant manufacturer may be used if necessary when care is
taken to ensure that the liquid does not contact joint surfaces before the sealant.
• - 2. . Provide concave tooled joints unless otherwise indicated to provide flush tooling or
recessed tooling. .
G. Remove sealant from adjacent surfaces in accord with sealant and substrate manufacturer
recommendations as work progresses.
H. Seal bottoms of hollow metal frames to floor at resilient flooring.
I. Seal edges of wainscot(s) to door jambs.
r J. Protect joint sealants from contact with contaminating substances and from damages. Cut out,
remove and replace contaminated or damaged sealants, immediately, so that they are without
contamination or damage at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
l
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07900-7
Printed 03:02'05
- r r am amt . or r as r III i ION r um rr r rr r an
SECTION 08000
DOOR AND RELITE SCHEDULE
NOTES, SEE REMARKS COLUMN:
1. REFINISH EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME. PROVIDE HARDWARE PER SCHEDULE.
2. REFINISH EXISTING DOORS AND FRAME.
3. REFINISH EXISTING DOOR AND REPAINT EXISTING FRAME.
4. REPAINT EXISTING FRAME:
5. PROVIDE A PAIR OF DOORS: ONE LEAF 3' -0" AND THE OTHER LEAF 2' -4 ".
6. SWING DOOR 180 DEGREES.
7. EXISTING WALL
8. REVERSE SWING OF DOOR. MODIFY FRAME AND DOOR AS REQUIRED
9. INSTALL STAINLESS STEEL KICKPLATE ON CORRIDOR SIDE OF DOOR TO MATCH EXISTING
GENERAL NOTES:
1. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY ALL WALL THICKNESSES PRIOR TO FRAME INSTALLATION AND FABRICATION.
2. * INDICATES SIMILAR DETAIL.
3. ALL DOOR SWINGS ARE 90 DEGREE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
•
•
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III - CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 231 08000 -1
. = i
A A P
I p p ;p z O
o > ;> ;> o O
•
y °
p , W W ' W f�ij,,.,
v •
O O WIDTH f
O
. all i J
p p p HEIGHT m 1
t
•
U' u' �' THICKNESS
4 •- 'p
n
R--) 0 i O SEE SHEET A8.01
m
j METAL Q
I.
X 1 i x X SOLID CORE - WOOD O r
H ACOUSTIC DOOR Y
ALUMINUM ENTRANCE
Y
INTEGRATED METAL DOOR ASSEMBLY ' ^
• r n x COILING DOOR •
x PAINT
VV I
STAIN
Z = O i X 1 x x MANUFACTURER FINISH . S ^
I ' • 4 /
r x a
d I> x X TEMPERED TYPE - "T" O
a —
CLEAR INSUL. TEMP. - "CIT" x ,7c7
Z FIRE RAPED GLASS - "FR" C C I
INSUL. ACOUSTIC GLASS -."LAG" c' n' p a r
1
LAMINATED SAFETY GLASS "LSG" r r
x O I INS. ACST. GL. FIRE RTD. "AGFR"
O In o p oo III
C r- i ! J H SEE SHEET A8.01 b • p
• P_, b i a I
H 9 j .. , k k' k METAL DR. FRAME OR RELITE ci, P
ACOUSTIC DOOR FRAME
'=i
H ACOUSTIC RELITE •
I
w INTEGRATED METAL DOOR FR. • 4'
N
rri STEEL - h7
• I !x Ix x PAINT .
Z I
1 MANUFACTURER FINISH •
■
y > > = ,
o o –. a .
. d d
- 1 J N N
i
r
� N cn
'p • d i p -- - r
i . ! . ! i
I "S" LABEL • •
ASSEMBLY FIRE RATING - MINUTES
a, CO i 00 HARDWARE GROUP
° o 4
. i
N
i
SECTION 08110
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
I .
PART 1 GENERAL .
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
• A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. .
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
1 A. Rated and non -rated rolled steel doors, frames and relites.
I 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03600 - Grout: Grout for frames. •
B. Section 04300 - Unit Masonry: Installation of frame anchors.
C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and methods of installation.
1 D. Section 08000 - Door Schedule.
E. Section 08210- Wood.Doors.
F. Section 08700 - Door Hardware: Door hardware for swinging doors and manufacturer's
templates for door fabrication.
PI . _ G. Section 08800 - Glazing: Door, window and relite glass and glazing sealants.
H. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors, frames and vision panels.
I • 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit product information on doors and frames under provisions of Section 01300.
2. Indicate door core, frame profile, frame corner detail, hardware preparations, and details
of glazing, and door edges.
I.
3. Indicate factory prime finish.
4. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for "S" labeled doors. A copy shall be
sent to the Architect and a copy shall be kept at the jobsite.
1 B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings of door and frame work under provisions of Section 01300.
I 2. Include door schedule which indicates door, frame, and glazed opening size, and door
core materials. •
3. Indicate profile and anchorage of glazing stops.
4. , Indicate door and frame assembly fire rating and sound rating. ,
I 5. Indicate any conflicts between specifications, templates, door and frame fabrication.
6. Details shall be submitted for all frames, clearly showing•throat size coordinated with
frame profiles and project wall types. Details shall be furnished at minimum scale of 3"
I = I' -0" for review. Incomplete or incorrectly drawn submittals will not be reviewed and
will be returned for resubmittal.
I
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08110 -1
Printed 03.02.05
•
• SECTION 08110
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
C. Test Reports: Submit copies of manufacturer's test reports for fire rated, "S" labeled and sound
rated doors. • 11
D. Templates: Submit letter to Architect certifying that Hardware Templates, from supplier of Door
Hardware — Section 08700, have been received and reviewed prior to fabrication of doors and
frames.
1.05 REFERENCES •
• A. DHI - Door Hardware Institute: The Installation of Commercial Steel -Doors and Steel Frames, •
• Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.
B. • ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines.
C. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
D. UBC Standard 7 -2 — Positive Pressure Fire Test Method.
E. SDI -100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
F. SDI -105 - Recommended - Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. -
G. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. '
H. UL IOC - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
I. ASTM A525 — General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip
Process.
J. ASTM A526 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized). by the Hot Dip ,
Process, Commercial Quality.
K. ASTM A642 — Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Drawing Quality,
Special Killed. - -
L. ASTM-E283 Air Infiltration.
• M. ANSI 224.1 - Modified Epoxy •
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE I
- A. Conform to requirements of SDI -100. -
B. Fire rated door and frame construction to conform to UL 10B and UL 10C.
C. Installed frame and door assembly to conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated in
Schedule. I
D. • "S" Labeled doors: Conform to UBC Standard 7 -2.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated frames.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
" MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08110 -2
Printed 03.02.05 ,
SECTION 08110
' METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
I 1. Amweld •
• 2. Ceco
3. Curries
4. Deansteel
5. Flemming
. 6. Republic
I 7. Steelcraft
8. Stiles Hollow Metal
B. Substitute Manufacturers:
I 1. Comply with requirements in. Section 01600, Material and Equipment.
2.02 EXTERIOR DOOR FABRICATION
A. • Fabrication of Standard Exterior Doors:
1. Industry Standard: ANSI /SDI 100, Grade II, Model 2, seamless.
2. . Door Face Sheets: Minimum 18 gage galvanized steel.
I 3. Door Edges: Seamless, continuous welded and ground smooth seam.
4. . Door Top End Closure: Flush with steel channel, Tack weld in place, seams filled flush
to prevent water penetration. .
p
5. Core: Steel stiffeners at 6 inches on center with fiberglass insulation.
6. Door Thickness: 1 -3/4 inches.
7. Finish:
a. Base metal: A60 galvanized finish .
i b. Primer: Manufacturer's standard polyamide epoxy primer, containing minimum
. 57 percent solids by volume. Comparable to Tnemec's N27 Typoxy.
• c. Application Rate: .3 to.4 mils, dry film thickness.
1 d. Primer must be compatible with Industrial coating as specified in Section 09900.
2.03 INTERIOR DOOR FABRICATION
I A. Fabrication of Standard Interior Doors:
1. Industry Standard: ANSI /SDI 100, Grade II, Model 2.
2. Door Face Sheets: Minimum 18 gage steel, 16 gage at Doors 48" and over in width.
I
3. Core: Steel stiffeners at 6 inches on center.
4. Door Thickness: 1 -3/4 inches.
5. Fire Rating: Fabricate interior door and frame assemblies for fire ratings indicated on
I 6. - door schedule. -
Finish:
a. Primer: ANSI A224.1 1987, Gray epoxy ester.
b. Application Rate: 2 mils, dry film thickness.
2.04 FRAME FABRICATION
I A. Fabrication of Exterior Door Frames:
•
1. Industry Standard: ANSI /SDI 100. •
2. Frame Metal: 16 gage galvanized steel.
I
I 02054
MAR 05 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III - CE2 /TRANSITIONS
TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08110 -3
Printed 0302 05
SECTION 08110
1
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES '
1
3. Frame Corners: Fully welded, all joints and corners shall have contact edges closed tight
and mitered. Provide watertight unit.
4. Frame Dimensions: 2 inch face or 4 inch face at masonry openings, 5/8 inch integral
• stop, single rabbet with frame depth as shown on drawings. .
5. Finish: I
a. Base metal: A60 galvanized finish
b. Primer: Manufacturer's standard polyamide epoxy primer, containing minimum
•
57 percent solids by volume. Comparable to Tnemec's N27 Typoxy.
• c. . Application Rate: 3 to 4 mils, dry film thickness.
d. Primer must be compatible with Industrial coating as specified in Section 09900.
6. Fire Label: Furnish frames with fire label as indicated in door schedule and on
Drawings. 1
B. Fabrication of Standard Interior Door, Side Lite, and Relite Frames: •
1: . Industry Standard: ANSI /SDI 100.
2. Frame Metal: 16 gage steel, 14 gage at frames with door leafs 48" and over in width. I
3. Frame Corners: Welded.
4. Frame Dimensions: 2 inch face, 5/8 inch integral stop single rabbet with frame depth as
shown on drawings. i
5. Finish:
a. Primer: ANSI A224.1 1987, Gray epoxy ester. •
b. Application Rate: 2 mils, dry film thickness. I
6. Fire Label: Furnish frames with fire label as indicated in door schedule and on •
Drawings.
7. Glass stops: Prepare window frame to receive glass stops on secured side of interior
frames.
2.05 HARDWARE PREPARATION
A. Hardware Preparation: I
1. Prepare doors and frames to receive door hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing,
drilling, and tapping.
2. Reinforce door frames with 3/16 inch by full width by 11 inch long steel plate
reinforcing welded to frame at hinge pockets, removable mullion heads, and closers.
3. Reinforce doors with 3/16 inch solid stock steel plate reinforcing welded to door at
closer, lock, exit device, pull handle, holder, and stop mounting locations, extending 2
inches beyond hardware in each direction. Refer to manufacturer's template for
recommended reinforcing locations.
4. Prepare non -sound rated single. interior door frames to receive three silencers on strike
jambs. Silencers provided by hardware supplier under Section 08700.
5. Prepare non -sound rated interior door frames for pairs of doors to receive four equally
spaced silencers on head. Silencers provided by hardware supplier under Section 08700.
6. Prepare fire rated doors and frames to meet requirements of NFPA 252, with
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Warnock- Hersey International, and CABO NER Report
for fire rating indicated on Door Schedule.
7. Furnish frames with 8 jamb anchors and 2 floor anchors, weld floor anchors to frame.
8. . Prepare doors to receive hardware in compliance with ANSI A 115 and ADAAG
I
guidelines.
2.06 DOOR ACCESSORIES
t
A. Metal Vision Lites:
1. Size and Location: As indicated on Drawings.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08110-4
Printed 03 02.05
I SECTION 08110
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
I
2. Finish: Custom Factory Baked Finish.
I 3. Standard Vision and Fire Rated lite glazing frames: Square edged, 18 gage steel frame,
mitered corners. Fasteners through bolted and countersunk flat head at exterior face and
tamper resistant screws at interior face.
4. Manufacturers: Metal frames: Anemostat FGS 75 or Manufacturer's standard which is
I .
equivalent to Anemostat brand specified. Fire Rated metal frames: Anemostat FGS 75 or
Manufacturer's standard meeting the above criteria for interior doors, FGS -DBL at
exterior doors by Anemostat.
I 5. Submit substitution requests prior to Bid Date. Comply with requirements in Section
01600, Material and Equipment.
I PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
I A. Installation of Door, Window, and Relite Frames:
1. Install steel frames and anchor frames to wall and floor in accordance with
I
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Apply 1/16 inch thick bituminous coating on inside of frame at all exterior door and
window frames..
3. Attach jamb anchors to adjacent walls as indicated in manufacturer's standard details.
I 4. . Fill all exterior frames and selected interior frames with cement grout as indicated on
drawings.
5. Cover hardware openings in frames to prevent cement grout from entering the hardware
recess.
6. Install frames to plus or minus 1/16 inch for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness.
pil ,
7. Install glazing as scheduled.
8. Seal joints of dissimilar materials with sealant as specified under Section 07900.
I B. Installation of Doors:
1. Fit doors to frame providing clearances required by SDI 100.
2. Install door and frame hardware after site finishing doors and frames.
3. Install glazing as scheduled.
C. Installation of Fire Rated Assemblies:
. 1. Install fire rated door and frame assemblies in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80.
2. Comply with fire rating requirements indicated on door schedule.
3. Install glazing as scheduled.
I 3.02 COMPLETION
A. . Adjusting Defective Work:
1. Adjust clearances and hardware placement for smooth door operation.
2. Touch up scratched exterior doors and frames with Tnemec -Zinc at 2.5 to 3.0 mils dry
film thickness.
I B. Final Cleaning:
1. Clean door, hardware, and frame surfaces prior to Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
I
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08110 -5
P Inted 0302.05
SECTION 08210 ,
' WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
I 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
1 Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
I A. Solid core flush wood doors, rated and non- rated, shop finished.
I 1.03 - RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08000- Door Schedule.
I B. Section 08110 — Metal Doors and Frames: Steel door frames.
C. Section 08700 - Door Hardware: Door hardware and Installation.
D. Section 08800 - Glazing: Door light glass and glazing sealants.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
I A. Product Data: •
1. Submit manufacturer's product information including selected materials and finishes for
Pi wood doors.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings to indicate door elevations and location and size of glass lites.
I. 2. Indicate details of glazing stops.
3. Indicate any conflicts between specifications, templates and door fabrication.
I C. Product Samples:
1. Submit three 6 by 6 inch minimum size sample of shop finished face veneer with door
edge for Architects Review.
2. Submit 1 sample, 'to painting subcontractor, for each door color as defined under Sections
I 09000 — Interior Finish Schedule and 09900 — Painting.
D. Test Reports:
I . 1. Submit copies of manufacturer's test reports for fire rated and sound rated doors.
E. Certificates:
I 1. Submit certificate or letter from manufacturer, certifying that flush wood doors meet or
exceed current AWI and NWWDA Standards.
2. Submit test results from an independent testing laboratory to indicate that flush wood
doors have successfully passed the 500,000 cycle slam test.
I 3. Submit test results from an independent testing laboratory to indicate that flush wood
solid core doors meet or exceed current ANSI Standards for impact resistance. •
4. Submit test results that product meets UBC 7 -2 for "S" labeled doors.
IS. Submit certification from manufacturer that specified hardware, supplied under Section
08700 — Door Hardware, complies with manufacturer's tested assembly for "S" labeled
doors.
I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 . TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08210 -1
Printed 3.22005
SECTION 08210
. WOOD DOORS
F. . Templates: Submit letter to Architect certifying that Hardware Templates, from supplier of Door
Hardware — Section 08700, have been received and reviewed prior to fabrication of doors and
frames.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NWWDA I.S.1 - Industry Standard For Wood Flush Doors (Includes Standards I.S.1.1
through I.I.S.1.7).
B. AWI - Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute.
•
C. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. •
D. UL 10C — Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
E. UBC Standard 7 -2 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: I
1. Furnish fire rated doors with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or Warnock- Hersey
International Listing.
2. Fire Door Construction: Conform to UL IOB and UL IOC.
3. "S" Labeled doors: Conform to 1997 UBC Standard 7 -2.
4. Positive Pressure Doors: Conform to 1997 UBC Standard 7 -2. •
B. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NWWDA I.S.1.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping:
• 1. Furnish wood doors with slip sheets, poly- wrapped or individually cartoned.
B. Storage and Protection:
1. Comply with requirements in AWI, Section 1300 -G -22.
2. Store doors in dry area with humidity between 30 and 50 percent.
1.08 WARRANTY
• A. Manufacturer's Warranty: I
1. Furnish manufacturer's standard limited 5 year warranty for each door.
2. Include replacement of doors with defective materials and labor up to original cost of the
door.
3. Include removal, refinishing, and re- hanging of doors with defective surface and
finishing labor up to original cost of the door.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS I
A. Acceptable 5 -Ply Flush Wood Door Manufacturers:
1. Algoma Hardwoods
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08210 -2
Printed 3.2_2005
SECTION 08210
• WOOD DOORS
I
• 2. Pacific Architectural, Inc., Portland, OR.
3. Oshkosh Corporation, Wood Door Division, Oshkosh, WI.
4. Eggers
5. Weyerhaeuser:
6. VT Industries.
III 7. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
8. Lynden Doors, Inc.
I B. Acceptable 7 -Ply Flush Wood Door Manufacturers:
Graham MFG., Co.
- • 2. Vancouver Door Company, Puyallup, WA.
3. Western Oregon Door.
4. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
5., Lynden Doors, Inc.
I C. Other Manufacturers:
1. Submit substitution requests prior to Bid Date.
2: Comply with requirements in Section 01600, Material and Equipment.
• I 2.02 INTERIOR DOORS
A. Hardwood Faced Swinging Doors: '
I 1.
2. NWWDAArchitectural Door Code: PC or FD:
Face Veneer: Select Golden Oak; Plain Sliced; Book match
3. Veneer Grade: AA.
4. Door Grade: Premium.
5. Solid Core: 28 to 32 pounds per cubic foot average density particleboard, except mineral
pi.
core at 45, 60, and 90 minute rated fire doors: Comply with particleboard standard ANSI
A208.1, Grade 1 -LD -2. ,
I 6. Pairs of doors: Veneers to be set matched.
7. Core Edge: Glue Bonded.
8. Fire Rating: as indicated on Door Schedule.
I 9. Adhesive: Type I, waterproof.
2.03 DOOR ACCESSORIES
•
I A. Metal Vision Lites:
1. Size and Location: As indicated on Drawings.
•
2. Finish: Custom Factory Baked Finish. .
I 3. Standard Vision and Fire Rated lite glazing frames: Square edged, 18 gage steel frame,
mitered corners. Fasteners through bolted and countersunk flat head at exterior face and
through bolted and countersink tamper resistant screws at interior face.
I 4. Manufacturers: Metal frames: Manufacturer's standard meeting the above criteria or
Anemostat FGS 75. Fire Rated metal frames: Manufacturer's standard meeting the
above criteria or FGS 75 for interior doors, FGS -DBL at exterior doors by Anemostat.
5. • Submit substitution requests prior to Bid Date. Comply with requirements in Section
I . . 01600, Material and Equipment.
2.04. FABRICATION
A. Fitting and Machining Doors:
1. Vertical Edge Clearance: 1/8 inch.
2. Top Edge Clearance: 1/8 inch.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III - CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 . TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08210 -3
Printed 3 ^_ 2005
•
•
SECTION 08210
I
WOOD DOORS
III
• 3. Bottom Edge Clearance: 1/2 inch, except where undercut is indicated on Door Schedule.
4. Lock Edge: Bevel 1/8 inch in 2 inches on swinging doors.
5. Machine Doors: Cut openings for recessed hardware as required by door hardware
indicated in Section 08700, Door Hardware.
B. Fabrication Requirements for Flush Wood Doors: I
1. Fabricate doors to comply with Industry Standard, I.S. 1 -A published by NWWDA.
2. Fabricate doors to comply with AWI, Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards,
Sections 01300 and 01500. I
3. Veneer substrate to be hardwood, MDF substrates will not be accepted.
4. Sand cores prior to application of door face veneers.
' 5. Fabricate doors with hardwood crossbanding. MDF will not be allowed as a face veneer
substrate.
•
6. Face veneers shall not be less than 1/50 inch thick at 12 percent nominal moisture
content.
7. ° Fabricate doors with 3/4 inch thick edge strips of wood species to match veneer.
I
C. Fabrication Requirements for Fire Rated Flush Wood Doors: •
1. Reinforce styles to meet ANSI Standards for screw withdrawal and modified cleavage.
2. Fabricate doors with 5 inch wide minimum top and bottom rails and 5 inch wide
minimum lock blocks for installation of door hardware.
3. Veneer crossbanding to be hardwood, MDF substrates will not be accepted.
4. Fabricate doors to meet fire rating indicated in Door Schedule.
I
5. Attach fire rating label to door edge., On "S" labeled door provide special label
indicating "S" label, temperature rise rating, product serial number, and the listing
agency's logo and name.
6. Provide required additional door components at fire rated pairs of doors scheduled to
4
receive concealed vertical rod exit devices.
7. On "S" labeled doors provide Intumescent gasketing, at head and jambs, concealed under
wood door edge. Adhesive applied, surface applied intumescent gasketing will not be ,
I
accepted. Comply with ITS /Warnock Hersey "Category A" door construction.
D. Shop Finish for Transparent Finished Doors:
1. AWI Factory Finish System: No. TR -2 Catalyzed Lacquer..
2. AWI Quality Grade: Custom.
3. Degree of Sheen: Medium gloss rubbed, 35 to 45 degrees on 60 degrees gloss meter in
accordance with ASTM D523.
III
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. "S" Labeled Doors: ,
•
1. Manufacturer shall verify that door hardware supplied under Section 08700 — Door
Hardware, complies with manufacturer's tested assembly for "S" labeled doors.
2. Fabrication Tolerances: As required by manufacturer to meet "S" label requirements.
B. Other Doors: Meet requirements of hardware manufacturer and AWI.
I
I
•
I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08210 -4
Primed 3 22005
SECTION 08210
WOOD DOORS
.1
PART 3 EXECUTION •
3.01 PERFORMANCE
A. Installation of Interior Doors:
1. Comply with NWWDA I.S. 1 -A, Section G -20.
. 2. Store doors 7 days at building temperature and humidity before
•
3. Comply with building code and fire rating requirements.
4. Install doors to meet fire rating indicated on door schedule.
5. Install fire rated doors to requirements in NFPA Standard No. 80 and NFPA Standard
101.
3.02 COMPLETION
A. Adjusting Defective Work:
.1. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.
' 2. Repair damaged shop finish to match adjacent door finish.
B. Final Cleaning:
1. .Remove dirt, paint splatters, and dust from wood doors prior to Substantial Completion.
2. Wash and wipe dry glass lights in doors prior to Substantial Completion.
•
END OF SECTION
PP1 •
i
1
1 .
1
1
1
1
020S4 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
' MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08210 -5
Printed 3:22005
I SECTION 08305 •
ACCESS DOORS
I
PART 1 GENERAL
1 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
' A. Rated and non -rated access doors and frames.
I 1.03 RELATED WORK .
A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Application over wall and ceiling finish.
I B. Section 09900 - Painting: Field finishing.
1.04 SUBMITTALS •
I . A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Include sizes, types, finishes, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work.
I
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
PI PART 2 PRODUCTS
i 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Milcor, Inc.
' B. Bilco Co.
•
C. JL Industries.
I D. ELMDOR Manufacturing Company
I E. Nystrom Products Co. .
F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 ACCESS UNITS
A. In Framed Ceilings and Walls: .
1. . Milcor "Fire -Rated Door "; primed, 20 gage steel, 90 minute min. fire rating. Self
closing.
I 2. Milcor "Style DW" non -rated access door; primed, 14 gage steel door panel.
3. Provide flush keyed locks in all wall access doors. All doors keyed alike.
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08305 -I
Printed 3:2 2005
SECTION 08305
ACCESS DOORS.
. PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION - ACCESS DOORS
A. Install rated access doors in ceilings and walls carrying ratings.
B. Install frame plumb and flush with wall surface.
C. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access.
D. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Paint under provisions of Section 09900 - Painting. I
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08305 -2
Primed 3.2 2005
I SECTION 08700
DOOR HARDWARE
I
PART1 GENERAL
I • 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hardware for wood and hollow steel doors.
I B. Thresholds. .
C. Gasketing. ,
I D. Hardware as scheduled on Drawings and end of this Section.
E. Furnish templates to Section 08110, 08210 and 08255 for door and frame preparation.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A.. Section 03600 — Grout: Grout under Thresholds.
B. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Installation of hardware.
po .
C. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Hardware for doors.
D. Section 08210 - Wood Doors: Hardware for doors.
I E. Section 08255 — Integrated Metal Door Assemblies: Cylinders for Doors.
I 1.04 REFERENCES
A. Americans with Disability Act Accessibility Guidelines(ADAAG) Federal Register - Rules and
Regulations.
I B. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
I . C. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.
1.05 COORDINATION .
I A. Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving manufacturer of
any internal reinforcement for door hardware.
I B. Wiring, junction boxes, conduit, etc., for electrically controlled and /or monitored hardware are to
be provided by other sections of this specification. Coordinate voltages, conductor requirements,
• etc. with the affected sections.
I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08700 . -1
Printed 03'0205
•
•
SECTION 08700 -
DOOR HARDWARE
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: •
I : Obtain each type of hardware from only one manufacturer, except where indicated
otherwise in hardware schedule.
B. Supplier Qualifications:
1.. Hardware supplier shall have furnished hardware in the same market area as the project
for a period of not less than 2 years.
2. Hardware supplier shall have in his employment an experienced Architectural Hardware
Consultant (AHC) who is available for project hardware consultation to the Owner,
•
Architect, and Contractor.
3. Hardware supplier shall review and approve Hardware Installer qualifications.
•
C. Installer Qualifications: Company shall have a minimum of 2 years experience in the installation ,
of commercial grade hardware.
D. Keying Meeting:
1. Upon receipt of final hardware schedules, hardware supplier shall request Contractor to
arrange a keying meeting between hardware supplier and Owner's Representative.
2. From information obtained at this keying meeting, submit 3 copies of detailed keying
schedule. '
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to the requirements of ADAAG for making buildings accessible to and usable by
physically handicapped occupants.
1.08 RESPONSIBILITY
A. The types listed are to be used as a guide for quality and operation and are not to be construed as a
complete list. The detailing of the hardware requirements shall be the responsibility of this
• Contractor.
1.09 SUBMITTALS
•
A. Submit schedule, shop drawings, and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. ,
C. List each opening, door size, door hand, door and frame material, door label, manufacturer's
number and finish. '
D. Provide edited product data cut sheets on specified hardware. Clearly identify hardware items
represented within submittal. Submittals containing complete product line catalogues will be
rejected.
1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700.
•
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08700 -2
P 03-02- 05
I SECTION 08700
DOOR HARDWARE
f
. B. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related •
I to preventative maintenance.
. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .
I A. Deliver products to site under provisions of. Section 01600.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
C. Package hardware items individually; label and identify package with door opening code to
. match hardware schedule.
1 D. Protect hardware by storing in secure area.
1.12 WARRANTY •
I A. Provide one year warranty for general hardware, ten years for closers and three -year warranty for
exit devices under provisions of Section 01700.
I 1.13 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS .
I A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.
B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. •
pi PART 2 PRODUCTS .
I 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Butts:
Hager.
I l.
. 2. Lawrence.
3. McKinney. *(MCK)
4. Stanley. •
I B. Latchset, Locksets:
1. Schlage. *(SCH)
I C. Cylinders: •
1. - Exterior and Interior: "E" Keyway, verify with district.
I D. Surface Closers:
1. LCN - 4111 Series.*
E. Exit Devices and Mullions:
r 1. Von Duprin - 99 Series. *(VD)
F. Stops and Holders:
1. Builders Brass Works.
2. Glynn- Johnson.
3. Ives. *(I V E)
I 4. Quality.
02054 • TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J . 08700 -3
Printed 03.02'05
SECTION 08700
DOOR HARDWARE
G. Push and Pull-Plates:
1. Builders Brass Works. I
2. Trimco.
3. Tice. *(TIC)
4. Quality.
I
H. Thresholds, Gaskets, and Weatherstripping:
1. National Guard.
2. Pemko. *(PEM) I
3. Reese.
I. Astragals:
I
1. Pemko. *(PEM)
2. Reese.
3. National Guard
J. Automatic Door Bottoms: I
1. Pemko. *(PEM)
2.. Reese.. i
3. National Guard.
K. Flush Bolts, Dust Proof Strikes, and Coordinators:
1. Glynn Johnson.
2. Door Controls International. *(DCI)
L. Silencers:
1. Builders Brass Works. '
2. Glynn Johnson. 4
3. Ives. *(IVE)
I
A. Other Manufacturers:
1. Submit substitution requests prior to Bid Date.
2. Comply with requirements in Section 01600, Material and Equipment. I
* Manufacturers specified in hardware schedule at end of this Section.
2.02 LOCKSET /LATCHSET DESIGN I
A. Design: Rhodes, except where listed otherwise.
B. Strikes to have extended lip strike where required to protect trim, ANSI prep. ,
C. All locks to have 2 3/4 inch backset.
2.03 KEYING
A. Provide temporary construction cylinders for locks, as required by contractor, keyed alike.
1
Supply twenty (5) keys for use by Contractor.
B. Permanent Door Locks: Designed to allow keying by hardware supplier. Master keyed and Grand I
master keyed to Owner's existing keying system.
I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08700 -4
I
Printed 030205
I . .
'
• SECTION 08700
DOOR HARDWARE
i i
• C. Supply all keys in the following quantities: .
I 1. 2 keys per lock.
2. 6 master keys, per master key group.
3. 4 grand master keys. .
I D. Mark all keys "DO NOT DUPLICATE ". Do not stamp keys with door number or bitting.
Serially number all keys in accordance with Owner's instructions.
2.04 FASTENINGS
A. Furnish hardware with all necessary screws, bolts and other fastenings of suitable size and type to
I securely anchor in position and harmonize with hardware material and finish.
2.05 FINISHES .
' A. . Finishes are identified in the schedule at the end of this section.
PART 3 EXECUTION .
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of Recessed Door Hardware: .
1. Install recessed hardware, then remove and store recessed hardware in a secure place
PI during application of door and frame finish.
2. After finishing doors and frames, reinstall recessed hardware.
B. Installation of Surface Mounted Door Hardware:
. 1. Anchor kick plates with oval -head full- thread screws, spaced uniformly at a maximum of
5 inches on center at kick plate perimeter.
2. Anchor thresholds with a positive anchoring device or expansion shield and anchor bolts.
3. Set thresholds in full bed of grout, refer to Section 03600 - Grout.
1 4. All closers to be thru- bolted to door.
•
3.02 COMPLETION
I A. Operating Hardware Adjustments:
1. Check and adjust operating hardware and each door operation to ensure smooth
operation.
I 2. Lubricate moving parts with type of lubrication recommended by manufacturer.
3. Use graphite or WD 40 if no other lubrication is recommended.
4. Replace hardware which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate correctly.
I 5. Adjust door closers to required opening force and closing speeds, per ADAAG. Door
closing speed shall be consistent through -out the building. Properly adjust backcheck on
closers per manufacturer's recommendations.
I B. Contract Closeout Adjustments:
1. Where hardware installation is made more than one month prior to occupancy of a space
or area, return to the work not more than 7 days prior to occupancy, and make a final
I check and adjustment of door hardware.
C. Re- adjust and inspect hardware for opening force and closing speeds, per requirements of
ADAAG, after final system balancing of Mechanical Systems.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08700 -5
Printed 03.02 05 .
•
•
SECTION 08700
• .1
DOOR HARDWARE
•
1
3.03 HARDWARE SCHEDULE .
- A. Required Door Hardware: '
1. Furnish the following hardware groups for each door as indicated on the Door Schedule,
and as required for a complete installation.
I
. 2. Include items listed,and required for a complete installation regardless of omissions or
conflicts in Contract Documents.
3.04 SCHEDULE
•
,
HW -1
QTY ITEM MFR NUMBER . SIZE FINISH
Existing hardware to
I
remain. Add the
•
following:
1 ea. • Closer LCN 4111 689
1 set Smokegasket PEM 297AV I
HW -2
1 ea Cylinder . SCH 20 -001 626 . I
. HW -3
3 ea. Butts MCK TA2714 — NRP at 4 x 4 'V2 652
reverse bevel doors.
I
1 ea. Lockset . SCH D93PD Rhodes 626
1 ea. Closer LCN 4111 • 689
1 set Smokegasket PEM 297AV
1 ea. Door stop IVE . WS406 630 4
3 ea. Silencers IVE 20
. HW -4 I
3 ea. Butts MCK TA2714 — NRP at 4'/ x 4 %2 • 652
reverse bevel doors.
1 ea. Exit Device VD 98L -F -2 x 994L. 626
I
1 ea. Cylinder SCH 20 -001 626
1 ea. Cylinder SCH 20 -022 626
1 ea. Closer LCN 4111 - Provide metal closer 689
cover at fire rated
• drs. greater than 20
minute. •
1 ea. Door stop IVE . WS406 . 630
1 set Smokegasket PEM . 297AS .
3 ea. Silencers . IVE 20
HW -5
I
3 ea. Butts MCK TA2714 — NRP at 4 % x 4 %2 652
•
reverse bevel doors.
1 ea. Exit Device VD 98L 626
I
1 ea. Cylinder SCH 20 -022 626
1' ea. Closer LCN 4111 689
1 ea. Door stop IVE • WS406 630
I
- 3 ea. Silencers IVE 20
•
I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J ' . 08700 -6 I
Printed 03'0205 -
1
SECTION 08700
. DOOR HARDWARE
( I
HW -6
I . QTY ITEM
3 ea. Butts • MFR NUMBER SIZE . FINISH
MCK NUMBER
— NRP at 4'/ x 4 1/2 652
reverse bevel doors.
1. ea. Lockset SCH D70P.D Rhodes 626
I 1 ea. Door stop IVE WS406 . 630 -
3 ea. Silencers IVE 20
I H W -7
3 ea. Butts MCK TA2714 -NRP 4 1/2 x 4 % 652
1 ea. Privacy Lock SCH L9496PD 06 lever 626
x XL11 800
1 set Soundgasket PEM 319CN
1 ea. Door Bottom PEM 430CPKL
1 ea. Threshold PEM 151A
I 1 ea. Door Stop • IVE • WS406 . 630 .
3 ea. Silencers IVE 20
HW -8
3 ea. . Butts MCK TA2714 — NRP at 4 ''/ x 4 '/z 652
reverse bevel doors.
1 ea. Lockset SCH D53PD Rhodes 626
', 1 ea. Door stop IVE WS406 630
3 ea. Silencers IVE 20
0
H W -9
3 ea. Butts MCK TA2714 — NRP at 4 ''/ x 4 '/2 652
reverse bevel doors.
1 ea. Lockset SCH D93PD Rhodes 626 .
1 ea. Closer LCN 4111 689
1 set Smokegasket PEM 297AV •
3 ea. Silencers IVE 20
I . HW -10
3 ea. Butts MCK TA2714 — NRP at 4 'A x 4 1/2 652
reverse bevel doors.
I 1 ea. • Lockset SCH D93PD Rhodes 626
1 ea. Closer . LCN 4111 689 •
1 set Smokegasket PEM 297AV
1 ea. Kickplate TIC B3EKP 10" X 2" LDW 630
1 ea. Door stop IVE WS406 630
3 ea. Silencers IVE 20
I . HW -11
3 ea. Butts . MCK TA2714 -NRP 4 % x 4. %z 652
1 ea. Lockset SCH D66PD 626 .
1 set Soundgasket PEM 319CN
1 ea. Door Bottom PEM 430CPKL
1 ea. Threshold PEM 151A
1 ea. Door Stop IVE WS406 630
3 ea. Silencers IVE 20
END OF SECTION
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08700 -7
Rimed 03 02,05
•
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
I .
•
• PART 1 GENERAL
I 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
I A. Glass and glazing for hollow metal work, windows, relites, and doors.
I B. Ceramic Glass installed in hollow metal work, windows, relites and doors.
C. Unframed Mirror Glass installed in selected rooms.
I 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back -up materials.
B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazing in hollow metal frames and doors.
t ' C. Section 08210 - Wood Doors: Glazing in wood doors.
D. Section 08410 — Aluminum Storefront: Glazing for Storefront windows.
p i 1.04 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
'I I. ASTM E119 Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
2. ASTM E2074 -00 Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
3. E2010 -01 Methods for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
I B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): .
1. NFPA 80: Fire Doors and Windows.
2. NFPA 251: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
I 3. NFPA 252: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. .
4. NFPA 257: Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
I C. Uniform Building Codes (UBC):
1: UBC -7 -1: Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
2. UBC -7 -2: Methods for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
I 3. UBC -7 -4: Methods for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): .
1. UL 9: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
2. UL 10 B: Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
3. UL 263: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
I E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI Z97.1: Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings.
I
I . 02054
MAR 05 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III —.CE2 /TRANSITIONS
TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08800 -1
Printed 03 02,05
•
•
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
1
F. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): •
1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. ,
'G. FS DD -G -451 - Glass, Float or Plate, Sheet, Figured (Flat, for Glazing, Mirrors and Other Uses).
H. FS DD -G -1403 - Glass, Plate (Float), Sheet, Figured, and Spandrel (Heat Strengthened and Fully '
Tempered).
I. FS TT -S -227 - Sealer Compound: Rubber Base, Two Component (for Caulking, Sealing and ,
Glazing in Building Construction).
J. FS TT -S -1543 - Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (for Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in
Buildings and Other Structures).
K. FS TT -S- 001657 - Sealing Compound: Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based Solvent Release
Type (for Buildings and Other Types of Construction). I
L. FGMA - Glazing Manual.
M. SIGMA — Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Provide fire rated glazing manufactured, fabricated and installed to
maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure.
1. Fire Rating: 45, 60, or 90 minutes as specified. See Door & Relite Schedule for location .
of rated openings.
2.. . Window Certification: Window assemblies with ratings of less than 60 minutes shall be
tested in accordance with E2010 -01, NFPA 257, UBC 7 -4, UL 9 Standard Test Methods.
3. Wall Certifications: Window /wall assemblies with ratings of 60 minutes shall be tested in
accordance with ASTM E119, NFPA 251, UBC 7 -1, UL 263, Standard Test Methods for
Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
4. Door Certifications: Doors shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E2074 -00, NFPA
252, UBC 7 -2, UL 10b Standard Test Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
5. Testing Laboratory: Fire test shall be conducted by an approved independent testing
laboratory, similar to Warnock Hersey International or Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
B. Listings and Labels:
1. Fire rated glazing shall be under current follow -up service by an approved independent
agency and maintain .a current listing or certification. Assemblies shall be labeled in
accordance with limits of listings. • .
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling, 111
and installation requirements.
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300.
•
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08800 -2
•
Primed 03 02 05
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
•
• 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Conform to Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual Glazing Sealing Systems
Manual for glazing installation methods.
' B. Conform to Uniform Building Code for safety glazing locations and fire rating.
C. '• Applicable requirements of ANSI Z97.1
D. Each piece of safety glass shall have manufacturer's "stamp" etched on the glass and visible when
installed.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Deliver products to. site under.provisions of Section 01600.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
1.09 WARRANTY • •
A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1111 . 2.01 GLASS MANUFACTURERS
A. ASG Industries.
•
B. Ford Industries. •
I C. Libbey- Owens -Ford Glass Co.
i
D. • PPG Industries, Inc.
E. Globe /Amenada.
• F. . Guardian Industries Corp.
•
G. Viracon.
' H. Cardinal Glass
I. Oldcastle Glass
J. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 GLASS MANUFACTURERS — FIRE RATED GLASS •
A. Basis of Specification: Safti Glass Products; San Francisco, CA; SuperLite II -XL in ratings as
specified.
•
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08800-3
Primed 0302 -05
•
SECTION 08800
• GLAZING
•
1
B. Comparable Products by the following manufacturers:
1. Technical Glass Products (TGP); Kirkland, WA ,
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. •
2.03 GLASS MATERIALS •
A. Clear Tempered Safety Glass (Glass Type "T "): 1/4 inch thick clear tempered safety glass
conforming to FS DD -G -1403. For non -rated applications in interior metal- framed relites. I
B. Fire Rated Glass (Glass Type "FR") clear, fire and safety rated, optically clear and colorless,
tempered, polished both sides, cavity gel - filled; overall thickness varies with rating as follows:
45- minutes - 3/4 inch thick; 60- minutes - 1 1/8 inch thick; 90- minutes - 1 1/2 inch thick. Fire
rated label permanently attached to each pane. Conforming to ANSI Z97.1. and NFPA 80; also
meeting the requirements of UBC -7 -2 "Methods for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies" and UBC -7 -4
• — "Methods for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies ".
C. Insulated Clear Tempered Safety Glass Units: (Glass Type "CIT "): SIGMA No. 64 -7 -2 double
pane with glass to elastomer edge seal. Inboard pane: % inch thick; clear tempered float glass
Low -E coating (coated surface #3), similar to Cardinal Clear #2. Outboard pane % inch thickness
clear tempered float glass, conforming to Fed. Spec. DD- G- 1403B. Winter U Value of no greater
than .29 and a shading coefficient of no more than .44. Argon filled cavity, conforming to Fed.
Spec. DD- G -1403B with total unit thickness of one inch.
•
D. Insulated Tempered Obscure Glass Units: (Glass Type "ITO ") SIGMA No. 64 -7 -2 double pane
with glass to eastomer edge seal. Inboard pane: 1/4 inch thickness, clear tempered float glass.
Outboard pane: 1/4 inch thickness, frosted tempered glass 86 percent light transmission,
conforming to Fed. Spec. DD- 6- 1403B. Argon filled cavity, conforming to Fed. Spec. DD -G-
1403B with total unit thickness of one inch.
E. Mirror Glass: Unframed Mirror Glass, quality q3, opaque alloy coating, % inch thick laminated
glass, smooth and polished edges. Industry Standard - ASTM C 1048. ,
2.04 ACCEPTABLE GLAZING COMPOUND MANUFACTURERS
A. Tremco. '
B. Dow Corning Corp.
C. General Electric Co.
• D. Morton Thiokol Inc.
E. ' Pecora Corp.
F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.05 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A. Glazing Compound: FS TT -G -410; Black color.
B. Butyl Sealant: FS TT -S- 001657; Shore A hardness of 10- 20; black color; non - skinning.
•
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08800 -4
Printed 03.0205
fI • SECTION 08800 •
GLAZING
11
I C. Polysulphide Sealant: FS TT -S -227; Class A, Type 2; two component; cured Shore A hardness of
15 -25; color selected by Architect/Engineer.
D. Silicone Sealant: FS TT -S -1543; Class A; single component; chemical curing; capable of water
1 immersion without loss of properties; cured Shore A hardness of 15 -25; clear color.
2.06 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
I A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, Shore A durometer hardness..
I • B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene; Shore A durometer hardness. .
C. Glazing Splines: Resilient polyvinylchloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot;
black color.
I . D. • Sealant Tape: 100 percent solid, crosslinked butyl, preformed sealant. Density, 1/5 grams per cc
. (plus or minus 0.05 grams per cc.). Tremco — 440 — II Tape.
I •
PART 3 EXECUTION
1 3.01 INSPECTION .
01 A. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for work
of this Section.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.
1 3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses.
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
3.03 EXTERIOR WINDOW GLAZING - INSTALLATION
I A. Use dry method, glazing tape inside, snap -in aluminum glazing bead outside.
I B. Cut glazing tape to length, do not stretch; install on permanent metal stop projecting 1/16" out
from sightline. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant. •
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points.
I C.
D. Rest glass on setting blocks and push glass against tape with sufficient pressure to attain full
contact at perimeter of pane. .
E. Seal edges of glass with heal bead of glazing sealant.
1•
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
1 MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08800 -5
.Primed 03.02'05
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
1
F. Install snap -in glazing beads. Make sure glazing beads exert pressure for full continuous contact
with glass. 1
G. Trim extruded tape edge with slight slope for drainage and to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
3.04. INTERIOR GLAZING - INSTALLATION
A. Use dry method (tape on both sides of glass) for glazing interior hollow metal doors and relites. I
B. Cut glazing tape to length, do not stretch; install on permanent stops, projecting 1/16" out from
sightline. I
C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points.
D. Rest glass on setting blocks and push glass against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane. 1
E. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glass pane in same manner described above.
F. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous
contact.
G. Knife trim protruding tape so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. '
H. Fire Rated Glazing: Installation shall be in strict accordance with the fire resistant glazing
material manufacturer's specifications. Field cutting or tampering is strictly prohibited.
I. Unframed Mirror Glass: Install with manufacturer's approved construction adhesive.
3.05 PROTECTION . '
A. Protect glazing work until Final Completion.
B. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways
during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism
3.06 CLEANING
A. After installation, mark pane with an "X" by using plastic tape or removable paste.
B. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
C. Remove labels after work is completed. '
D. Wash and polish glass on both sides not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for substantial
completion.
END OF SECTION
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08800 -6
•
Primed 03 02 05
•
M. NMI II= 1111111 s i. ti . _. s MN
SECTION 09001
• INTERIOR FINISH LEGEND
•
•
1. Carpet:
CPT -1 Mannington Commercial, Carthage III 2602 "Mineral Bluff ".
•
2. Vinyl Composition Tile: •
•
VCT -1 • Mannington Designer Essentials, color #288, "Brick ".
VCT -2 Mannington Designer Essentials, color #246, "Bronze ".
VCT -3 Mannington Designer Essentials, color #295 "Deep Fern".
VCT -4 Mannington Designer Essentials, color #123, "Wheat
•
3. Sheet Vinyl Floor:
SV -1 Mannington Fine Fields, color #110150, "Chamois ".
4. Base:
B -1 4" rubber base: Flexco, color #038, "Outer Banks ". •
B -2 4" Epoxy Resin cove base
B -3 6" sheet vinyl cove base • -
5. Tacksurface
TS -1 Koroseal Muratone, color #M621 -61, "Tropic Sunset ". •
TS -2 Koroseal Muratone; color #M621 -37; "Papyrus ".
TS -3 Koroseal Muratone, color #M621 -46, "Teneres Dunes ".
•
6. Tackboard
TB -I Koroseal Muratone, color #M621 -61, "Tropic Sunset ".
TB -2 Koroseal Muratone, color #M621 -37, "Papyrus ".
TB -3 • Koroseal Muratone, color #M621 -46, "Teneres Dunes ".
•
•
•
•
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09001 -1.
Printed 3 . .
-- — I um um No um mi. E 1 W u H OS ® l- ma ® so i MI
SECTION 09001 •
INTERIOR FINISH LEGEND •
•
7. Ceramic Tile: - •
CT -1 • Floor tile — Keystones, #D179 ; "Cotto Speckle ".
CT -2 Wall tile Field Color— Daltile, #160; "Cornsilk ".
CT -3 Wall tile Accent Color — Daltile, #Q181. ; "Cotto ".
CT -4 Not Used.
CT -5 Wall tile Accent Color— Daltile, #1452; "Cypress ".
8. Paint:
P -1 Miller, CW025W, "Restorative ", field color
•
P -2 Miller, 8766N, "Caribou ", hollow metal frame color
P -3 Miller, 7816N, "Tasmanian Myrtle ", accent color
P -4 Miller, 8165D, "Antique Pine ", accent color
P -5 Miller, 7744M, "September Leaf", accent color
P -6 Miller, AC144N, `Black Deco"
•
9. Acoustic Ceiling Tile •
ACT -1 24" x 48" Lay -In; White •
ACT -2 24" x 48" Scored Lay -In; White
10. Plastic Laminate:
PL -1 Wilsonart #4673 -60 "Saffron Tigris ", countertop
PL -2 Wilsonart #4826 -60 "Windswept Copper ", cabinet faces •
PL -3 Pionite #AV801 Suede, "Olive Serenity ", cabinet faces
11
•
. Wood Trim
WT -1 Maple hardwood, clear finish •
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09001 -2
Piintcd 322005
_ gm um am turn sof mu lir mai ,olo ism nu Oa Am, No it' I=
SECTION 09001
INTERIOR FINISH LEGEND
12. Plastic Toilet. Compartments
PTC -1 Poly -Mar HD "Paisley"
13. Vinyl Wall Covering:
VWC -1 Vinyl Wall Covering Colour & Design, Inc. Yoshi 20oz. CD2- YOS -00 Ivory
GENERAL NOTES:
1. Finish material followed by a number is referencing a color number and /or style number.
2. All walls to be painted P -1 unless otherwise noted on interior elevations, including walls not elevated.
ABBREVIATIONS:
•
AFF Above Finish Floor
•
•
EX Existing
OTS Open to Structure
ME Match Existing
TBS To Be Selected. - •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III - CE2 /TRANSITIONS •
MAR 05 TIGARD TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09001 -3
Printed 3;2'2005
�, SECTION 09100
• METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS •
PART I GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS •
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and other Conditions and
II Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in the Section
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
.1 A. Interior load and non load- bearing steel studs.
B. Framed soffits for gypsum wallboard.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
I A. Section 06112 Framing and Sheathing: Structural roof deck.
B. Section 06181 — Glue- Laminated Structural Units: Roof framing members.
I C. Section 07213 - Batt and Blanket Insulation: Thermal and sound insulation.
Section 07900 - Sealants.
I D.
�E. Section 09120 - Ceiling Suspension System: Coordination of systems.
0 F. Section 09260 Gypsum'Board: Gypsum board systems.
1.04 S YSTEM DESCRIPTION .
I A. Structural Requirements:
1. Steel Framing Systems: Maximum deflection of L/240 for design loads.
2. Seismic Loads: Provide steel bracing members to carry loads created by seismic
1 movement of the ceiling and wall systems.
• B. System Tolerances:
1. Do not exceed 1/4 inch framing variation in 8' -0" from plumb, level, and true lines.
II
2. Do not exceed 1/8 inch framing variation in 8' -0 from plumb surface in framing areas
scheduled to receive thin set ceramic tile and fiberglass reinforced polyester resin panels.
I
1.05 SUBMITTALS
•
A. Product Data:
I 1. 2. Submit product data for metal studs, runners, and furring channels.
Submit Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. design numbers and CABO NER reports for fire-
rated wall and ceiling assemblies as required by local building officials.
B. Installer:
I 1. Submit of list of completed projects prior to commencement of work.
I 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installers to have minimum 5 years documented experience installing metal stud systems.
I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 TIGARD TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09100 -1
• Printed 3 2.2005
•
. 4
• SECTION 09100
•
METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
'B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with building code and governing authorities' requirements for fire -rated walls
and ceilings. t,
1.07 . DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING.
A. Storage and Protection: •
1. Store steel materials in dry, ventilated space, under cover and 4 inches above concrete
floor slabs. '�
2. Protect structural members from excessive stress during erection.
PART 2 • PRODUCTS I
•
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
• i
A. Steel Framing Systems: it
1. Angeles Metal Systems, Inc.
2. Domtar Gypsum America, Inc. • , I
3. Georgia Pacific.
4. Gold Bond Building Products, A National Gypsum Division.
5. Knorr Steel Framing Systems.
6. Steeler, Inc.
7. United States Gypsum Company. •
. B. Powder Driven Fasteners: • ii
1. Hilti Fastening Systems.
2. ITW Ramset, Illinois Took Works, Inc.
C. Other Manufacturers:
1. Submit substitution requests prior to Bid Date.
2. Comply with requirements in Section 01600.
2.02 FRAMING COMPONENTS 1
A. Lateral Load Bearing C- Studs:
I. Industry Standard: ASTM C 645.
2. Type: Punched lateral load bearing steel C- studs. ■
3. Flange Profile: 1.250 and 1.375 inch with 1/4 inch stiffening lip.
4. Metal Thickness: Gage as required for span. Refer to manufacturer's printed span table '�
for spans required for construction. Minimum gage shall be 20 gage.
5. Minimum Yield Strength: 33,000 psi for 18 and 20 gage, 50,000 psi for 12, 14 and 16
gage. :
6. Width: 1 -1/2, 3 -1/2, 6, 8 inches and except as indicated on Drawings.
7. Flange Texture: Knurled.
8. Finish: ASTM A 525, G -60 galvanized.
9. Track: Manufacturer's standard profile, except extended legs at top track to prevent axial
loading of studs. 1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09100 -2
/
Primed 3.2 2005
�' SECTION 09100
METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
1
B. Lateral and Axial Load Bearing Structural C- Studs:
1. Type: Punched lateral and axial load bearing steel C- studs.
I 2. Standard Flange: 1.250 and 1.375 inch with 1/4 to 1/2 inch stiffening lip.
• 3. Metal Thickness: 20 gage, except where 22 gage, 0.0283 inches is indicated on
Drawings.
I 4. Minimum Yield Strength: 33,000 psi. .
5. Size: .3-1/2 inches, except as indicated on Drawings.
6. .Track: Manufacturer's standard profile.
7 Acceptable 1.250 and 1.375 Inch Flanged Studs: SS Series by Knorr, HDS Series by
AMS.
C. Structural Joists: •
1. Type: Punched load- bearing steel C- shaped joists.
2. Wide Flange: 1.625 inch with 1/4 to 1/2 inch stiffening lip.
3. Metal Thickness: 18 gage, 0.0478 inches, except where 20 gage, 0.0346 inches is
I indicated on Drawings.
4. Minimum Yield Strength: 33,000 psi.
5. Size: 6 inches, except as indicated on Drawings.
6. Acceptable 1.625 Inch Flanged Joists: WC Series by Knorr, XHD Series by AMS.
1 D. Framing Accessories: . .
1. Screw Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, roll - formed, hat shaped 25 gage, G -60 zinc-
"! coated steel with :knurled face.
2. Steel Cold Rolled Channels: ASTM C 754, 3/4 inch and 1 -1/2 inch wide, 16 gage, G -60
• galvanized or black asphaltum painted steel.
• Pl.. 3. Resilient Channels: Galvanized steel channels, RC -1 as manufactured by U.S. Gypsum
Company.
4. Shaft Wall Framing Angles: Corrosion resistant steel and aluminum framing angles
furnished or recommended by shaftwall stud manufacturer.
5. • "Z" Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, roll formed, 2 inch depth, 25 gage, G60 zinc
coated steel. .
6. Framing Screws: ASTM C 954 or ASTM C 1002, Type S.
' 7. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Gun fired fasteners by Hilti or ITW Ramset.
ill E. . Acoustical Sealants:
1. Acoustical Caulking: ASTM C 919, non- hardening polyisobutylene rubber.
2. Foam Acoustical Tape: Polyvinyl chloride or polyurethane foam tape.
3, Comply with requirements in Section 07900, Joint Sealers for materials and methods of
installation.
1 • -
PART 3 EXECUTION
i 3.01 PERFORMANCE
A. Verification of Conditions: •
1. Examine structural framing and conditions under which wall and miscellaneous framing
I systems are to be installed.
2. • Start of Work will indicate acceptance of surfaces and conditions within each area..
I B. Surface Preparation:
1. Coordinate wall and soffit framing locations with plumbing, fire sprinkler, heating,
ventilating, communications, and electrical work.
1 .
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
1 MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09100 -3
Printed 3:20005
• SECTION 09100
METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
1
C. Requirements for Installation of Wall and Soffit Framing Systems:
1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for installation of studs, runners, and furring channels.
2. Space framing and fasteners as required to meet allowable deflection and fire rating
requirements; give support for covering material, and as indicated on Drawings.
3. Comply with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and Building Code requirements for fire
rated assemblies.
4. Install doubled 25 gage or single.20 gage C -studs at walls which support toilet
compartment and urinal screen brackets, handrail brackets, grab bars,_shower seats,
mechanical equipment, electrical equipment, and fire extinguisher and stand pipe
cabinets mounted on stud partitions.
5. Install 20 gage C -studs in framed walls with glass mesh mortar unit panels as a substrate
for ceramic tile finished walls.
6. Typical framing to be a gage as designed by manufacturer's printed materials or as
required for engineered systems. •
7. Coordinate installation of gypsum board fire proofing for columns, control joints and
other penetrations.
8. Construct vertical and horizontal soffit framing as indicated on drawings or at a
maximum of 24 inches on center. Install diagonal bracing in soffits at a maximum of 48
inches on centered, staggered if condition allows.
D. Installation of Framed Openings:
1. Coordinate opening requirements for fire extinguisher cabinets, toilet accessories, pipes,
conduits, ducts, light fixtures, electrical boxes, and other items concealed within framing
space.
2. Install framing members around items shown to be recessed within framing space.
3. Install steel cold - rolled channels above and below wall openings which interrupt stud •
framing members and extend the channels to 4 feet beyond each jamb, to transfer loads
to adjacent studs.
4. Install two boxed 25 gage or two 20 gage C -studs at door jambs and comply with
recommendations in Gypsum Association, GA -219.
E. Installation of Blocking:
1. Install 14 gage continuous steel plate blocking or 1 -1/2 inch wide nested cold rolled
channel blocking and anchor to steel studs for structural support for toilet compartments,
grab bars, and handrails.
2. Install 16 gage continuous steel plate blocking or fire- retardant treated 2 by 6 wood
blocking secured to steel studs for wall mounted cabinets, equipment, toilet accessories
and miscellaneous door hardware mounted to walls.
3. Install 2 x 12 fire retardant treated wood blocking secured to steel studs for wall mounted
accessories.
F. Installation of Acoustical Sealants:
1. Install acoustical caulking, or foam acoustical tape at edges of sound control wall and
ceiling framing.
3.02 COMPLETION
A. Adjusting Defective Work:
1. Replace defective wall and ceiling framing members.
2. Relocate hanger wire, cross tees, and main runners to allow for installation of fire
sprinkler, mechanical, and electrical equipment and systems.
3. Adjust ceiling height to meet maximum deflection limits of L/360.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09100 -4 • 1
Printed 3.22005
•
SECTION 09100
METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
4. Patch and repair any damaged fire proofing.
B. Final Cleaning:
1. Remove excess materials from the site. •
1 END OF SECTION
1.:
1
•
•
1
•
.
1
1
.1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
1 MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09100 -5
Printed 322005
SECTION 09120 •
CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS .
1
PART 1 GENERAL .
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
I A. Suspended metal grid system for gypsum ceilings.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS .
A. Section 09100 - Metal Support Systems - Coordination of framing systems.
B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Gypsum Board and accessories for installation of
suspended gypsum ceilings.
1 C. ,Division 15 - Grilles, Registers and Diffusers: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system.
D. Division 16 - Interior Lighting Fixtures: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
•
1 1.04 REFERENCES
P . A. ASTM C635 — specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panel
Ceilings.
B. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in
Panels.
1.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 - A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system with three
years minimum experience.
1 B. Installer: Company with three years minimum experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
i A. Conform to 1997 Uniform Building Code Standards with Oregon Amendments and seismic zone
3 requirements for lateral bracing.
I 1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
I B. Provide product data on metal grid system components.
;, C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300.
D. Submit one sample each, 24 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner and edge
trim.
i
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09120 -1
Printed 3 2 05
SECTION 09120
CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
•
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. •
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior 1
to, during, and after installation.
•
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Armstrong Contract Interiors. -
•
B. US Gypsum. • 1
•
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 MATERIALS •
A. Main Beam: Heavy Duty, double web steel construction, hot dipped galvanized; components die
cut and interlocking. Beam shall include integral splice for expansion relief.
B. Primary Furring Cross Tees: Double web steel construction, hot dipped galvanized, components
die cut and interlocking.
C. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices and edge moldings for suspended grid system.
D. Face Dimension: Provide 15/16 inch wide flange by 11/2 inch tall heavy duty.
E. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, to rigidly
secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with
maximum deflection of 1/360. Conform to applicable code requirements for lateral bracing of
grid and light fixtures.
•
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that all work above the ceiling line is complete.
B. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work.
C. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 1,
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION '
A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636 and as supplemented in this Section.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS �
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09120 -2
Printed 3 2 .05
SECTION 09120
. CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
1 .
I B. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. Install
Main Beams and Primary Cross Tees at spacing as recommended by manufacturer for type of
ceiling system is to support.
C. Install perimeter molding at intersection of suspension system and vertical surfaces, using longest
practical lengths. Allow for expansion and contraction of suspension system with vertical
• surfaces. Do not fasten Main Beams and Primary Cross Tees to perimeter moldings.
D. Provide expansion joints using two Main Beams to separate the suspension system as
• recommended by manufacturer. Place control joints in ceilings so that areas do not to exceed 450
I square feet and consistent with lines of building spaces or as shown on drawings.
E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest
I
affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to .
exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located where
required.
G. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.
1 H. Laterally brace entire suspension system per seismic requirements of the UBC.
PI 3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
END OF SECTION .
it,
.
. li
•
li
•
i
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09120 -3
. Primed 32.05
•
1 SECTION 09260 .
•
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
•
•
PART1 GENERAL
•
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
•
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
I A. Gypsum board and accessories.
1 • B. Taped and sanded joint treatment.
•
1.03 • SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
II A. Load Bearing Requirements: Steel framing systems maximum deflection of L/240 for design
loads.
•
1.04 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06112 — Framing and Sheathing: Solid blocking at reveal joints.
4
t B. Section 07213 - Batt and Blanket Insulation: Thermal and sound insulation.
0 C. Section 07900 — Joint Sealants: Sealants used in conjunction sealing joints of dissimilar materials.
D. Section 09100 - Metal Support Systems: Wall framing..
•
1 E. Section 09120 — Ceiling Suspension Systems: Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings.
F. Section 09321 - Ceramic. Wall Tile: Substrate for tile finish.
G. Section 09900 - Painting: Surface finish.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
1 B. ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction.
C. ASTM C514 - Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard.
1 D. ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring
Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
;! E. ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Wallboard,
Backing Board, or Water Resistant Backing Board.
,i F. GA -216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
G. Gypsum Construction Handbook - Current Edition: by United States Gypsum Company.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL = PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 • TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09260 -1
Printed 03,02,05
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
•
1
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
. A. Applicator: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work approved by manufacturer.
• B. Conform to Underwriter Laboratory for fire rating. • 1
C. Provide control joints and venting per United States Gypsum Company's Construction Handbook,
current edition..
•
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. •
B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM ,1
A. United States Gypsum.
B. National Gypsum Company.
. C. G -P Gypsum Corporation .
D. James Hardie Building Products - Hardirock
E: Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
111
2.02 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ANSI /ASTM C36; Type 'X' fire resistive, UL rated, 5/8 inch thick;
maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered and beveled edges.
B. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ANSI /ASTM C630; Type 'X' fire and moisture resistive type
at all toilet and locker room locations shown on Drawings, 5/8 thick, maximum permissible
length; ends square cut, tapered and beveled edges.
C. Abuse- resistant Gypsum Wallboard Panels: Cellulose fiber reinforced gypsum panels - ASTM
C36 long edges, tapered or beveled. Equivalent fire rating where required. 5/8" thick.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. • Corner Beads: All metal, galvanized.
B. Edge Trim: GA 201 and GA 216; type L bead primed metal galvanized.
C. Joint Materials: ANSI /ASTM C475; GA 201 and GA 216; reinforcing tape, joint compound, 1
adhesive, water, arid fasteners.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09260 -2
Printed 0; 02 05
•
SECTION 09260 •
• C TI O
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
.1 •
D. Control joints: Roll- formed zinc with tape protected opening 7/16 inch depth, metal perforated
flanges each side.
E. Reveal joints: Extruded Aluminum alloy 6063 -T5, clear anodized finish suitable for field
painting. Manufacturer: Fry Reglet Corporation. See drawings and details for sizes and profiles
1 used.
2.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES
i - A. Acoustic Sealant: Type recommended for use in conjunction with gypsum board - Refer to
Section 07900 - Joint Sealants.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1 3.01 INSPECTION -
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on
shop drawings.
• B. Verify that moisture content in framing lumber or blocking does not exceed 14 percent.
1 C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces and substrate.
0
3.02 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 201, GA 216 and UL requirements.
•
I B. Interior Gypsum Board — Refer to Schedule below for locations of different Levels of Finish:
1. Prefill:
a) Use setting -type joint compound. Mix joint compound according to
manufacturer's directions.
ir . b) Fill joints between boards flush to top of eased or beveled edge.
c) Fill joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings in fire -rated partitions.
d) Wipe off excess compound and allow compound to harden. •
: _ 2. •Taping (Level 1):
a) Butter taping compound into inside corners and joints.
b) Center tape over joints and press down into fresh compound.
c) Remove excess compound.
d) Tape joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings.
I 3. First coat (Level 2):
a) Use taping or all - purpose drying -type compound.
b) Immediately after bedding tape, apply skim coat of compound and allow to dry
I completely in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Apply first coat of compound over flanges of trim and accessories, and over
exposed fastener heads and finish level with board surface.
4. Second coat (Level 3): After first coat treatment is dried, apply second coat of
compound over tape and trim, feathering compound 2 inches beyond edge of first coat.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09260 -3
Pruned 03.02.05
•
•
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM. BOARD SYSTEMS
5. Third coat (Level 4):
a) After second coat has dried, sand surface lightly and apply thin finish coat to
joints, fasteners and trim, feathering compound 2 inches beyond edge of second
coat.
b) Allow third coat to dry. Apply additional compound, and touch -up and sand, to
provide surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges, and ready for
application of finish.
• 6. Skim coat (Level 5):
a) Apply skim coat of topping or all- purpose drying -type compound over exposed
surfaces of gypsum board.
b) After skim coat has dried, touch -up and sand to provide surface free of visual
defects, tool marks, and ridges, and ready for application of finish.]
C. Install Abuse resistant gypsum board at locations shown on Drawings.
D. Erect single layer gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring
over firm bearing.
E. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges. and ends occurring over firm
bearing.
F. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal framing. 1
G. Double Layer Applications: Secure second layer to first with fasteners.
H. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant.
I. Place corner beads at all external corners unless indicated otherwise. Use longest practical length.
Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
J. Place control joints floor to ceiling in long partition runs, in ceilings and soffits from fascia to wall
or relitc at not over 30 feet on center consistent with lines of building spaces, and from each
corner of door header to ceiling unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
K. Place control joints at ceilings so that areas do not to exceed 900 square feet and consistent with \�
lines of building spaces.
•
L. Install aluminum reveal shapes as detailed.
M. • Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board
with sealant.
N. Joint Sealants: Seal all exposed joints of dissimilar materials with Sealant as outlined under
Section 07900 — Joint Sealants.
3.03 JOINT TREATMENT (At Locations. Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish) ,I
A. Provide levels of gypsum board finish for locations as follows, in accordance with Gypsum
Association GA 214, "Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish" and GA 216
"Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board ".
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
- MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09260 -4 1
Printed 0302 05
' SECTION 09260 •
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
I .
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas, except provide higher level of finish
I as required to comply with fire resistance ratings and acoustical ratings.
2. Level 2: Gypsum board substrate at surfaces scheduled to receive tile, except remove
tool marks and ridges.
I ' 3. Level 4: Gypsum board surfaces in all Janitors Closets, Electrical Closets and Storage .
Rooms.
4. Level 5: Gypsum board surfaces in all areas except as noted above.
3.04 TOLERANCES
1 . A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
3.05 FINISH
A. Smooth finish, ready for paint provided under Section 09900.
END OF SECTION
i
10 ,
t
1
•
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 111 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09260 -5
Printed 03,0205
1 . •
SECTION 09312
• CERAMIC WALL TILE
1 .
PART 1 GENERAL
1 • 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
I A. Ceramic tile walls finish using the thin set application method. .
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04300 — Unit Masonry System: Wall substrate surface.
i. B. Section 07900 — Joint Sealants: Sealants used in conjunction with dissimilar materials.
•
•
C. Section 09001- Finish Legend.
I
- 1.04 REFERENCES
.111 A. ANSI /TCA A108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex
Portland Cement Mortar.
0 B. ANSI /TCA A118.4 Latex- Portland Cement Mortar.
C. ANSI /TCA A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
D. TCA (Tile Council of America) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
i A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
I B. Submit product data indicating material specifications, characteristics, and instructions for using
adhesives and grouts. -
C. Submit samples of tile and grout under provisions of Section 01300.
I D. Mount tile and apply grout on one 24 x 24 inch plywood panel, representative of pattern, color
. variations, and grout joint size variations. Tile sample will serve as sample of workmanship and
1 quality.
E. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01400 that products meet or exceed.
ANSI /TCA A136.1.
F. Contract Closeout:
1. Submit maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700.
2. Include recommended cleaning and stain removal methods, cleaning materials, and
polishes and waxes.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09312 -1
Printed 3 '2 2005
SECTION 09312
• CERAMIC WALL TILE
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to ANSI /TCA A136.1.
B. Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in this Section with
minimum three years experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section. Approved by product
manufacturer. .
•
1.08 PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Section 01040.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
C. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.10. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment.
B. Maintain 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation or mortar materials.
1.11 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide 2 percent of each tile color, size and shape used.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1
A. Dal -Tile Corporation.
B. American Olean Tile Company.
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09312 -2
Printed 3 2 2005
•
SECTION 09312
CERAMIC WALL TILE
.
2.02 TILE MATERIAL •
1 A. Ceramic Field Wall Tile: ANSI /TCA A136.1, similar to "Permabrites" and "Permatones" by Dal-
' Tile conforming to the following:
1. Size: 4" x 4" x 1/4" thick.
2. Edge: Cushioned.
• 3. : Surface Finish: Glazed — Matte Finish and Glazed High Gloss Finish for
. accent colors.
4. Color: Refer to Section 09001 — Interior Finish Legend.
B. Base — None: Resinous floor finish forms base.
I C. Cap: Same manufacturer and color as wall tile.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
l A. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type 1.
•
I B. Provide mildew- resistant silicone sealant specified in Section 07900 for non- grouted joints such as .
for expansion, isolation, and contraction of either the tile or the substrate.
PART 3 EXECUTION •
• 0 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing substrate.
•
3.02 PREPARATION
1 A. . Protect surrounding work from damage or disfigurement.
B. Vacuum clean existing substrate and damp clean.
I C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler.
I 3.03 INSTALLATION - DRY SET MORTAR METHOD
•
A. Application Methods: -
1. Toilet and Shower Rooms — Masonry Walls:-
I a. Install thin set mortar, tile, and grout to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation, Handbook Number W202 -03.
I B. Installation of Ceramic Tile:
I. Lay tile to pattern as indicated on drawings.
2. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases neatly. Align
;I 3. base and floor joints. Align wall and base joints as much as practicable.
Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size.
Make joints watertight without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout.
4. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. .
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09312 =3
Printed 3 22005
•
SECTION 09312 •
CERAMIC WALL TILE
5. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
6. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
7. Grout tile joints.
8. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and at junctions of dissimilar
planes.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 01700.
•
B. Clean tile surfaces.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
•
1
1
•
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09312 -4
Printed 3 2 2005
•
•
SECTION 09511
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
.1
. PART 1 • GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
I other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
•
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non -rated suspended metal grid ceiling system.
I B. Acoustical ceiling tiles.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
1 A. Section 09001 — Interior Finish Legend. .
B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems.
I
•
C. Division 15 - Grilles, Registers and Diffusers: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system.
D. Division 16 - Interior Lighting Fixtures: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
1.04 REFERENCES •
IS A. • ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method of Sound Absorption Coefficients by.the Reverberation ,
Room Method.
B. ASTM E90 - Standard Method of Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss
of Building Partitions.
I C. ASTM E413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class.
D. ASTM E795 - Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests.
1 E. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings.
F. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in
1 Panels.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE .
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and ceiling tile
with three years minimum experience.
1 . B. Installer: Company with three years minimum experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1 A. Conform to 1997 Uniform Building Code Standards with Oregon Amendments and seismic one
3 requirements for lateral bracing.
•
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
. MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09511-1
Painted 322005
•
SECTION 095.11
• SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Provide product data on metal grid system components and acoustic units.
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300.
D. ' Submit one sample 12x12 inch in size, illustrating material and finish of acoustic units. !
E. Submit one sample each, 24 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner and edge
trim.
F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
•
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 11
A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior
to, during, and after installation. 1
1.09 SEQUENCING /SCHEDULING
A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust 1
generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.
B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. •
1.10 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide extra quantity of acoustic units equal to 5 percent of total installed for each type of job.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Donn Products Inc.
B. Chicago Metallic Corp.
C. Armstrong Contract Interiors.
D. Celotex.
1
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS
A. Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate non -rated assembly exposed T; components die cut and
interlocking.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09511 -2
Printed 3 2 2 2005
•
I SECTION 09511 •
• SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
1 •
• B. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, edge moldings and holddown clips required for .
suspended grid system.
C. Grid Materials and Finish: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. Color:
White.
•
D. Face Dimension: Provide 15/16 inch wide grid similar to "DX" by Donn Products, Inc.
E. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, to rigidly
secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with
maximum deflection of 1/360. Conform to applicable code requirements for lateral bracing of
grid and light fixtures.
2.03 MANUFACTURERS - ACOUSTIC UNITS
I • A. Armstrong Contract Interiors.
B. USG Corporation. .
C. Celotex -
D. Substitutions: Conform to Section 01600. .
•
1 2.04 ACOUSTIC UNIT MATERIALS
A. Acoustical Panels, Non - Rated, (ACT -1):
1. Size: 24 x 48 inches.
0
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
3. Composition: Mineral fiber.
4. Light Reflectance: LR -1.
5. NRC Range: 0.55 to 0.65.
6. STC Range: 35 to 39.
111. 7. Fire Hazard Classification: 0 -25 Flame spread rating.
8. Edge: Square.
9. Surface Color: White.
10. • Pattern: "Radar No. 2310" by USG, "Cortega" #769 by Armstrong, "Boroque "# BET
197 by Celotex.
B. Acoustic Panels Non -Rated (Scheduled as ACT -2).
1. Size: 24 x 48.
2. • Thickness: 3/4 inch.
3. Composition: Mineral fiber. •
I 4. Light Reflectance: Minimum L.R. 0.80.
5. NRC Range: 0.50 to 0.60.
6. STC Range: 35 -39.
I 7. Fire Hazard Classification: 0 -25 (ASTM E1264)
8. Edge: Angled Tegular.
9. Surface Color: White
10. Pattern: Scored for 24 x 24 inch appearance. "Second Look II" #2767 by Armstrong;
Hytone Customline #BQCL - 224 by Celotex; Two /24 #3575 Omni Fissured by USG.
•
02054 TIGARD I -IIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III - CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09511 -3
Punted 32 2005
SECTION 09511- 111
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
1
C. Substitutions, prior to bid date and under provisions of Section 01640.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION 1
A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. •
• B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636 and as supplemented in this Section. 1
B. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum.
C. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other • r
work.
D. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members
are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest
affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
F. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.
G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to
exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located where
required. 1
H. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.
I. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths.
Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions.
J. Laterally brace entire suspension system per seismic requirements of the UBC.
1
K. Fit acoustic units and acoustic panels in place, free from damaged edges or other defects
detrimental to appearance and function.
3.03 TOLERANCES •
A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 1.0 ft.
END OF SECTION
•
• .r
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 0951 1 -4
Pr imed 3'2 2005
•
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
1 Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Resilient Base. •
. B. Resilient Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring.
C. Sheet Vinyl Flooring with coved base. ' .
I D. Accessories.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
1 A. Section 01400 — Quality Control: Testing of slabs for content of moisture and alkalinity.
B. Section 03201 - Reinforcing and Concrete: Floor Substrate.
C. Section 09001- Finish Legend .
01 D. Section 09622 - Resilient Athletic Flooring: Transitions between materials. •
E. Section 09680 - Carpeting: Transitions between materials.
1 F. Section 09705 - Decorative Resinous Flooring: Transitions between materials.
I 1.04 REFERENCES •
A. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
•
1 B. FS L -F -475 - Floor Covering, vinyl Surface (Tile and Roll), with backing.
C. FS SS -T -312 - Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, Vinyl Composition.
I D. FS SS -W -40 - Wall Base: Rubber.
1 E. Meet Requirements of Resilient Floor Covering Institute.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
1 A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. .
B. Samples:
'1 1.
2. Submit two box samples or chain sets for each floor material specified.
Submit two chain sets of base color for color selection specified by Architect.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
li MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09650 -1
Printed 0302 05
•
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
• 1
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1
•
A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring product as produced by a single-
. manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, edge strips and other
accessories as required.
•
B. Subcontractor: Subcontract the Work of this Section to a firm specializing in resilient flooring
Work, which is acceptable to the manufacturers of the products involved, and which can
demonstrate at least 5 years prior experience in successful installations similar to the Work
required herein.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
•
A. Conform to applicable code for flame /fuel /smoke rating requirements in accordance with
ASTM E84.
1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit cleaning and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule
for cleaning, stripping, and re- waxing.
1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature
stability.
B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and
24 hours after installation of materials.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS •
A. Provide extra stock of flooring and base equal to 5 percent of total installed for each type color on
job. •
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2.01 RESILIENT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING (VCT)
A. Manufacturers:
1. Mannington Designer Essentials •
2. Comparable products by the following Manufacturer's — must match color selected.
a) Armstrong World Industries.
3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Materials - Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS -T -312, Type IV. Industry Standards: ASTM F1066
Composition 1, Class 2. Fire Test: ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux 0.045 Watts /cm Smoke
Test: ASTM E62, 450 or less. Composition 1: 12 x 12 inch size, 1/8 inch thick. All tile from
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE I11— CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09650 -2
Primed 03 05
•
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING .
1 •
one batch, excessive color variation will not be accepted.
i •
C. - Color: Refer to Section 09001 — Interior Finish Legend.
2.02 SHEET VINYL, (SV)
A. Manufacturers:
1. "Fine Fields" by Mannington. -
I 2. Comparable products by the following Manufacturer's — must match color selected.
a) Armstrong World Industries.
3: Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. Substitutions only to be accepted
I pending approval of submitted color line.
B. Materials - Sheet Vinyl: FS L -F -475, Type II total thickness of 0.080 to 0.085 inches colors as
selected by Architect from manufacturers full color line.
2.03 BASE •
A. Manufacturers: .
1. "Wallflowers" by Flexco Company.
2. "Pinnacle SBR" by Roppe.
3. "RubberMyte" by Burke /Mercer Products Co., Inc. -
' 4. "Color Integrated Wall Base" by Armstrong.
• 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. •
PI B. Rubber Base Materials: ASTM F1861 — Type TS, Thermoset Vulcanized Rubber; continuous, 4
inch high; 1/8 inch thick; top set coved. Provide factory molded corners.
I C. Color: Refer to Section 09001 — Interior Finish Legend.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
1 A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.
B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof, low solvent and low "VOC's "; types recommended by
I flooring manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions.
C. Reducer Strips: As manufactured by Flexco Company, or approved, color as selected by
I Architect from full color line: -
1. VCT to Carpet: "No. 64" tile and carpet joiner.
2. Carpet to Ceramic Tile or Sheet Vinyl: "No. 64" tile and carpet joiner. •
3. VCT to Concrete: "No. 81" vinyl edge guard.
D. Cove Base:
1. Integral Cove backing strip: As recommended by Manufacturer.
I • 2. Edge Strip: Extruded Aluminum.
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE I1I — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09650 -3
P,;nted 03.0205
•
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
•
A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft, and are
ready to receive Work.
• B. Verify compatibility of resilient flooring adhesive to substrate.
C. Testing of concrete slab moisture: Shall be done by Owner's independent testing agency. 1
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION 1
A. Prepare the substrate according to the material manufacturer's installation instructions. Remove
subfloor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor
filler.
B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface. 1
C. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured.
D. Vacuum clean substrate.
E. Apply primer to substrate surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.03 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence-as manufactured and
packaged. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tiles are not acceptable.
C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
D. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. 1
E. Install tile to square grid pattern with all joints aligned, with pattern grain parallel for all units and
parallel to length of room. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or,area perimeter.
F. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar.
Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates.
G. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight
joints.
3.04 INSTALLATION — SHEET VINYL .1
A. Install over substrate as recommended by floor covering manufacturer.
B. Use only adhesive and seam sealer which are warranted by the manufacturer.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09650 -4
Primed 03 05
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
C. Place sheets abutted tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings and edgings. Scribe as
necessary around obstructions and to produce neat joints, laid tight, even and in straight, parallel
lines. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closet and similar openings.
D. Rout seams and heat weld joints of slip resistant sheet vinyl together with coordinated colored •
compound in accordance with resilient flooring manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges and where flooring terminates.
3.05 INSTALLATION - BASE
A. Determine base types from Section 09000 Interior Legend, and scheduled locations from •
Interior Elevation Drawings.
B. . Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints. Install
. as long lengths as practicable.
C. Miter internal corners.
D. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces. Apply to all permanent
• fixt in weduled Scribe ures and fit to room d o areas frames here and base other is interr
E. .
3.06 INSTALLATION - COVE BASE MATERIAL
A. Cove up to form 6" high base where scheduled. Form base integrally with floor over cove •
backing strip, and with metal trim at top. Cement base to cove strip and wall.
B. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges and where flooring terminates.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation.
3.08 CLEANING •
A. Remove excess adhesive from base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B. Clean, seal,- and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
•
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09650 -5
Printed 03 02 05
SECTION 09680
CARPETING
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
• 1
Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Carpet, glue -down method.
B. Accessories.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. - Section 01400 — Quality Control: Testing of slabs for content of moisture and alkalinity.
B. - Section 09001- Finish Legend
C. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring: transition strips.
1.04 REFERENCES
1 A. ASTM E648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy
Source.
PI B. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. FS DDD -C -95 - Carpets and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic.
i D. FS DDD -C -0095 - Carpet and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic, Polyester, Polypropylene.
E. Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) — CRI -104: Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet. -
I 1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers product data on specified products, describing physical and
performance characteristics, sizes, patterns and method of installation and maintenance.
C. Seaming Plan: Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams and direction of carpet, edge
strips and other installation details.
1 D. Samples: •
1. Submit two product books illustrating full range of colors and patterns for each carpet
'
2. material specified.
Submit two chain sets of edge strip and base gripper material for each color specified.
E. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of
1 Section 01300.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09680-1
Rimed 03'02'05
•
•
SECTION 09680 •
• . CARPETING
• 1
F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's written warranty complying with specifications on Corporate
letterhead and signed by Executive Officer. Products specified shall not be ordered until this
warranty is received and accepted by Architect.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1
•
• A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in carpet with three years minimum experience.
B. Installer: Company with 5 years minimum experience and approved by manufacturer. . 1
•
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for carpet flammability requirements of Class 1 or 2 for carpet on
•
• floors in accordance with ASTM E648.
1.08 MAINTENANCE
•
A. Extra Materials: Installer is responsible for accuracy of measurement and fit. Furnish scheduled
overrun for future repairs and replacement wrapped, packaged and labeled a the factory. Same .
dye lot and run as carpet installed. Save and package usable remnants, label and deliver to the
Owner.
B. Retain and identify trim pieces of usable size. Package and store same as specified for overrun.
C. Overrun Schedule: Provide in full 12' -0" wide material, 6' -0" minimum length. Provide the
following overrun for amounts installed:
1. 1 - 50 sq. yds.: 10 percent
2. 50 -250 sq. yds.: 5 percent
3. 250 plus sq. yds.: 3 percent
1
D. Maintenance Data: Provide spot removal, maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance
materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning and shampooing:
1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
•
A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature
•
stability.
B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature three days prior to, during, and 24 hours
after installation of materials.
•
•
C. Allow 48 hours ventilation after installation before releasing space to Owner.
1.10 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
A. Submit carpet manufacturers written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for
15 years. This warranty shall not be prorated and shall include all carpet, freight and labor, for
satisfactory repairs and /or replacements. The warranty shall address the following items:
1. 10 Year Texture Retention Warranty and color fastness to light warranty.
2. Fiber shall not wear more than 10 percent during the specified warranty period.
3. Guaranteed not to edge ravel at edges or seams for life (wet or dry).
4. 20 lb. tuft bind guaranteed for life (wet or dry).
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09680 -2
Primed 01.0205
I SECTION 09680
CARPETING
1. •
5. Guaranteed not to delaminate. .
I 6. Carpet to withstand wet or dry cleaning without affecting warranty.
B. Installation Warranty: Two year installation and workmanship warranty. Provide special project
• warranty, signed by contractor and installer, agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and
I workmanship of carpeting work during the 2 year warranty period, without cost to owner; and
agreeing to repair or replace other defects beyond Contractor's/ Installer's/ Manufacturer's
controls, as judged by the Architect, at Owner's expense at prevailing rates.
PART 2 PRODUCTS .
I 2.01 MATERIALS — CARPET
•
A. The following manufacturer's products are approved, provided they are in complete conformance
I with these specifications as noted.
1. Manufacturers: Mannington — Carthage III
2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. Provide with substitution request a
copy of warranty information and maintenance and installation guarantees.
I B. Materials shall be new and of domestic manufacture. Carpet is to be of "First" quality and from
the same dye lot for each color to be installed. Materials, construction and appearance are based
I on the following performance.specifications.
C. Carpet: CPT -1
PI . 1. Construction: Graphics Loop Pile
2. Face Yarn: Dupont Type 6,6, Continuous Filament Nylon w/
Soil Resistant Technology and Permant Static
Control.
3. Dye System: Solution dyed /Yarn dyed.
4. Tuft Bind: 20 Ib. average
5. Yarn Weight/sq. yd.: 20 oz.
6'. Backing: 100% Woven Polypropolene.
I 7. Width: 12 feet •
8. Density: 7,500 min..
9. Carpet Emissions: - Carpet must pass Indoor Air Quality Testing program
by C.R.I.
10. Carpet Flammability: Flooring radiant Panel test - NFPA 253 (ASTM
E -648) 0.45 watts /sq. cm. or greater. Smoke Density
I Chamber Test - NBS 708 (NFPA 258 -1986) density
of 450 or less.
11. Carpet Electrostatic Propensity: AATCC 134 -less than 3.5 KV at 20 percent RH at 70
degrees F.
I 12. Colors: Refer to Section 09001 Interior Finish Legend.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Sub -Floor Filler: White premix latex type recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof, low solvent and low voc; of types recommended by carpet
1 manufacturer.
C. Seam Sealant: Non - flammable type if required or recommended by carpet manufacturer.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J . 09680 -3
Printed 03,0205
•
SECTION 09680
CARPETING
1
D. Furnish all other accessories required for a complete installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
• A. Examine carpeting before installation for "streaking ", shading, soiling, tears, pull tufts or other
defects. Remove and replace any defective carpet.
•
B. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet
• and are ready to receive work. 11
C. Testing of concrete slab moisture: Shall be done under Section 09605 — Concrete Floor Vapor
Emission Sealer.
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove subfloor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with
subfloor filler.
B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface.
C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
D. Vacuum floor surface.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GLUE DOWN METHOD
A. Apply carpet and adhesive in strict accordance with manufacturers' instructions and with
guidelines established by CRI 105 (Carpet and Rug Institute).
B. Verify carpet color match before cutting. •
C. Locate seams in area of least traffic.
•
•
D. Fit seams straight, not crowded or peaked, free of gaps.
E. Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same:direction as anticipated traffic. •
F. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall opening into
another room. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
G. Cut and fit carpet around interruptions. Provide edge sealant as required by manufacturer. 1
H. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
I. Install carpet from wall to wall with no seams where room dimension allows. Verify on seaming 1
diagram submitted to Architect.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09680 -4
Printed 0302 05
•
SECTION 09680
CARPETING
1
3.04 CLEANING
1 A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
•
B. Remove all threads with sharp scissors and thoroughly vacuum clean. Installed carpet shall be
free of spots, soil, tears, fraying or pulled tufts.
3.05 PROTECTION
1 A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
•
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS •
MAR 05 TIGARD TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09680-5
Primed 030205
'SECTION 09900 •
• PAINTING
PART 1GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
B. Surface finish schedule.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Temporary heating and lighting.
B. Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System: Sealing and painting interior wall surfaces.
C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel items.
D. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Finishing of trim, wainscot, and shelving.
E. Section 06410 — Custom Casework: Painting of Countertop Support Brackets.
0 • F. Section 07900 — Joint Sealants: Sealants used in conjunction with preparation of painted surface.
G. Section 08000 - Door and Relite Schedule: Existing doors to be refinished in the field by Section
I 09900.
H. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Field painting of shop primed items.
I. Section 08210 — Wood Doors: Shop Primed Items.
J. Section 08255 — Integrated Metal Door Assemblies: Painting of door assemblies.
111 K. Section 08305 - Access Doors: Field painting of miscellaneous doors and access panels.
L. Section 09001 - Interior Finish Legend: Color Selections.
.M. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Wall and ceiling surfaces.
N. Division 15 - Mechanical: Exposed non - prepainted items.
O. Division 16 - Electrical: Exposed non - prepainted items.
. 1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.
B. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Manual.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2/TRANSIT1ONS
' MAR 05 TIGARD TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09900-1
Printed 3 • 2 05
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
•
.1
C. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA) Manual.
D. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA) Standard P3 for designation of Paint 1
• Colors.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. . Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1
A. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting special coatings and finishing with five
years experience. -
B. Conform to recommendations of the PDCA and SSPC manuals.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame /fuel /smoke rating requirements for finishes.
B. Coatings must comply with Oregon State Department of Environmental Quality "VOC Area
Source" Rules.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. •
B. Provide product data for each step or process described in 09900, Part 3 - Schedule: Exterior
Surfaces and Interior Surfaces.
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300.
D. Submit two "draw downs" 8 x 8 inch in size for each color and finishing product scheduled, for
Architects approval. Do no work until submittals have been reviewed and approved.
•
E. Submit manufacturer's application instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
F. Submit finish samples of all wood products, finished under this section. Obtain samples of wood
products from Section 06200 — Finish Carpentry.
. 1.09 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Locate where directed by Architect. 1
B. Apply 100 square feet of each coating and each paint at location on project directed by Architect.
C. Accepted sample will demonstrate minimum standard for work, and may remain as part of the
Work.
D. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of field samples. 1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09900 -2 111
Printed 3 ,2'05
•
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
1
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. •
1 C. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
D. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, manufacturer's
batch number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation,
and instructions for mixing and reducing.
E. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
1 degrees F, in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
' G. Confine the storage of paints and allied materials to a space particularly assigned, and keep such
space neat and clean at all times.
' H.. Open containers only as needed, and keep partially filled containers tightly closed when not in
• use.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
01 A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures
above 45 degrees Fahrenheit for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of
finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 85 percent,
or to damaged or wet surfaces unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees
• Fahrenheit for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid - height at substrate surface. •
' 1.12 COLORS
A. Colors of paints and shades of stain shall match approved control samples.
B. Locations for all deep tone accent colors are shown on the Drawings.
•
1.13 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide one gallon in unopened, original container of each color and surface texture to Owner,
minimum.
B. Label each container with color, color nix formula, texture and room locations, in addition to the
manufacturer's label.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 111 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
' MAR 05 TIGARD TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J • 09900-3
Rimed3205
SECTION 09900
•
- PAINTING
•
1
PART 2 PRODUCTS •
2.01 GENERAL 1
A. Products for each general purpose must be of same manufacturer.
B. Do not use products of different manufacturers over one another, except for shop prime coats
specified in other Sections.
•
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS PAINT 1
A. . Benjamin Moore;
. B. ICI / Fuller O'Brien.
C. - Kelly Moore. 1
D. Miller Paint.
E. Rodda Paint Co.
F. Sherwin Williams.
•
G. • PPG
•
H. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS — INDUSTRIAL GRADE COATINGS
A. Tnemec
B. Amneron
C. Carboline
•
D. DeVoe Coatings
E. Pittsburgh Paints, Industrial Maintenance High Performance Coatings.
F. Sherwin Williams Industrial and Marine Coatings. 1
G. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.04 MATERIALS
A. Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by
approved paint materials manufacturers.
B. Coatings:
1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste
• consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating.
2. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 1I1 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09900 -4
Printed 3.2 05
1 • SECTION 09900
PAINTING •
1
C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not
1 specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
1 A. . -
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition
that may potentially affect proper application. •
C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes .
unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
I 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. .
2. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measure in accordance with ASTM D2016.
I 3. . Exterior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016.
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.
P g
I 3.02 MATERIALS TO BE FINISHED
01 A. The following receives no finish except as indicated:
1. Metals such as: Brass, bronze, copper, plated metals, stainless steel.
2. Plastic Laminate surfacing.
3. Glass, unless otherwise noted.
4. Materials having complete factory finish, such as electrical switch plates, lighting
I fixtures, finish hardware, and the like.
B. All other surfaces are to be finished except as listed above or otherwise scheduled or noted.
I 3.03 PREPARATION
I A. Previously painted galvanized and primed steel surfaces: Remove rust and prepare surfaces in
accordance with PCDA Manual. Feather edges of existing paint and prime surfaces with
• compatible primer.
B. Previously painted or stained wood surfaces: Remove all oil, grease, silicone, wax and other
foreign matter: Moisture meter reading shall be no more than 12 percent, sand surfaces and
feather edges between paint layers or between paint and wood. Remove all dust and grit with tack
1 rag. Prime bare wood surfaces.
C. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or
I finishing.
D. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section.
1 E. Shellac and seal narks which may bleed through surface finishes.
F. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09900 -5
Printed 3x205
•
• SECTION 09900
•
PAINTING
G. Galvanized Surfaces: Prepare in accordance with SSPC -SPI Solvent cleaning.
H. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri- sodium phosphate and
bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
I. Previously painted Masonry. Surfaces: Pressure wash surface to remove loose paint prior to re-
painting. . •
J. Previously painted Concrete Masonry Surfaces and impervious surfaces: Remove mildew by
scrubbing with solution of tri- sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean.water and allow
surface to dry. Scrape as required to remove blistered or peeling paint. Feather edges of old
paint. Prepare in accordance with PCDA requirements.
•
K. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Prepare in accordance with SSPC -SP3 Power tool cleaning.
L. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Prepare in'accordance with SSPC -SP2 or SP3 Hand tool cleaning.
Feather edges•to make touch -up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC-
SP 1 Solvent Cleaning. Prime bare steel surfaces.
M. Interior Wood Items - Painted: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks,
and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between
coats. Back prime all wood surfaces which will be in contact with moist or damp areas.
N. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Prepare in accordance with SSPC -SP2 or SP3 Hand tool cleaning.
• Feather edges to make touch -up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC-
SP 1 Solvent Cleaning. Prime bare steel surfaces.
O. Joint Sealants: Seal all exposed joints of dissimilar materials with Sealant as recommended by
paint manufacturer and as outlined under Section 07900 - Joint Sealants.
P. Verify that Fiberboard Panels have all exposed sides sanded and eased with out any sand marks.
Q. Metal Door Frames:
1. After fasteners are field welded remove rust, spatter, and flux deposits.
2. Clean steel and prime fasteners and frames affected by welding with compatible primer.
3. Apply Bondo to frame to conceal fasteners, sand smooth and prepare for paint.
R. Metal Doors: Seal top and bottom edges with primer. '
3.04 PROTECTION •
•
A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. 1
•
B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.
C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from
disfiguring other surfaces.
D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 1
3.05 MIXING AND TINTING
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 1II — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09900 -6
I'rinted 3 2 05
I SECTION 09900
•
•
PAINTING
1
I A. Deliver paints and enamels ready -mixed to jobsite.
B.. Job -mix and job -tint only when acceptable to Architect. .
1 . C. Mix only in clean, rust resistant containers.
D. Use tinting colors recommended by manufacturer for specific type of finish.
1 3.06 APPLICATION -
•
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1 .
B. D not app finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
1 C. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.
E. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish:
F. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
I G. Prime back surfaces and edges of interior woodwork with primer paint according to type of
• scheduled finish.
01
H. Adequately ventilate areas following manufacturer's recommendations. Utilize forced ventilation
if necessary.
1 I. At existing walls scheduled to be repainted, walls shall be painted from nearest inside or outside
corner to nearest inside or outside corner and from floor to ceiling.
3.07 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to appropriate Sections in Division 15 and 16 for schedule of color coding and identification
banding of equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit.
B. Paint shop primed equipment.
1 C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
• components and paint separately.
I D. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts,
hangers, brackets, collars and supports, and except where items are prefinished.
I E. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally.
F. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and heating cabinets that are visible through
grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed
II behind louvers, grilles, and convector and heating cabinets to match face panels.
G. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITION'S. •
I MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09900 -7
Printed 3 2:05
•
SECTION 09900
•
PAINTING
1
H. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical before installing equipment.
I.
Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
J.. Paint exterior and interior exposed mechanical ductwork.
3.08 CLEANING
A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.
B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools,
equipment, surplus materials, and debris.
C. Collect waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal
•
containers and remove daily from site. 1
3.09 SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES
A. Steel - Shop Primed - All New Hollow Metal Frames, Misc. Steel, etc: 1
1.. One coat — Industrial Grade Coating: Tnemec N27 "Typoxy" at 2.0 -3.0 mils dry film
thickness.
2. One coat — Industrial Grade Coating: Aliphatic polyurethane enamel, Tnemec "Series
73" Endura- Shield at 3.0 to 4.0 mils dry film thickness.
B. Steel - Galvanized:
1. One coat— Industrial Grade Coating: Tnemec N27 "Typoxy" at 2.0 -3.0 mils dry film
thickness.
2. One coat — Industrial Grade Coating: Aliphatic polyurethane enamel, Tnemec "Series
73" Endura - Shield at 3.0 to 4.0 mils dry film thickness.
3.10 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES
A. Steel- Shop Primed 111
•
1. Touch up with original primer.
2. Two coats alkyd enamel semi - gloss.
3. Minimum dry thickness: 4.1 mils total.
•
B. Gypsum Board: Paint
1. One coat polyvinyl- acetate primer sealer.
2. Two coats interior latex enamel semi - gloss, apply final coat with roller. Minimum dry
thickness: 3.3 mils each coat.
C. Concrete Masonry Walls Semi - gloss:
1. Filler Coat: Latex Block Filler.
2. Two coats 100 percent Acrylic Semigloss Latex.
D. Concrete Masonry Walls (Showers /Toilets):
1. Filler: One coat — Industrial Grade Coating: Waterborne cementitious acrylic, Tnemec
Series 130 Envirofill 68 percent solids by volume.
2. Prime coat, one coat,— Industrial Grade Coating: Waterborne acrylic epoxy, Tnemec
Series 113 Tneme Tufcoat at 4.0 - 6.0 dry mils.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE II1 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09900 -8
Panted 3 2 05
I SECTION 09900
PAINTING
1
3. Finish Coat, one coat — Industrial Grade Coating: Waterborne acrylic epoxy, Tnemec
I Series 113 Tneme Tufcoat at 4.0 - 6.0 dry mils.
• B. Wood: Transparent (misc. exposed woodwork)•
1. One (1) coat nitrocellulose lacquer sealer, sandable, non - stearated typed for catalyzed
I
2. lacquer system. •
Sand with 220 grit stearated paper.
3. Two (2) coats clear modified alkyd nitrocellulose high solids catalyzed lacquer, 20
I percent solid by volume minimum; semi -gloss finish.
C. Steel - Shop Primed - Ceiling Areas, Exposed ductwork:
1. One coat water -based finish, Tnemec Series 115 Uni -Bond (57 percent solids by
volume.)
2. 2.5 to 3.0 dry mils
•
ID. Sprinkler Piping
1. Red Oxide, rust resistant primer.
2. 2 coats alkyd - flat. .
E. Wood; stained (Refinishing of Existing Wood Doors), Catalyzed Lacquer (CL):
.1. Fine sand to provide clean` smooth base.
2. One (1) coat nitrocellulose lacquer, polyurethane or oleoresinous type stain, compatible
1 with Lacquer system, color to match existing.
3. • One (1) coat nitrocellulose lacquer sealer, sandable, non - stearated typed for catalyzed
lacquer system. .
4. Sand with 220 grit stearated paper. •
5. Two (2) coats clear modified alkyd nitrocellulose high solids catalyzed lacquer, 20
. percent solids by volume minimum; semi -gloss finish. -
6. Color: To match existing doors. See Door Schedule for locations.
' ' F. Fiberboard Panels: Transparent (WSCT -1; applied with a short nap roller.)
1. One (1) coat Benwood Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane #423. .
2. Sand with 220 grit stearated paper.
3. Two (2) coats Benwood Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane #423; semi -gloss finish.
1 END OF SECTION.
1
1
1
•
1
1
02034 TIGARD I -IIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J . 09900 -9
Printed 3 2.03
•
•
SECTION 09950
WALL COVERINGS •
•
.1.
PART 1 GENERAL •
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
•
•
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
1 • A. Supply of selected wall coverings for installation by Others.
B. Supply and installation of wall coverings over gypsum board substrate at locations shown on
'drawings.
1.03 RELATED WORK FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 09001 - Interior Finish Legend: Color and pattern selections.
' B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Wall substrate.
•
C. Section 10100 - Visual Display Boards: Supply of Wall Covering for tackboards.
D. Section 10120 — Tacksurfaces: Supply of Wall Covering for tacksurfaces.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI /ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing commercial wall fabrics with five years
•
• documented experience.
•
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A: Conform to applicable code for flame /fuel /smoke ratings of 25/35/50 when tested to ANSI /ASTM
E84.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and samples under provisions of Section 01300.
' B. Provide product data on wall covering and adhesive.
C. Submit two samples of wall covering 12x12 inch in size illustrating color, finish, and texture.
D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
E. Submit test reports verifying flame /fuel /smoke ratings, when tested by an agency approved by
authority having jurisdiction.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I • MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09950 -1
•
Fumed 3 2 2005
•
SECTION 09950 111
• WALL COVERINGS
1
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING •
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. 1
B. , Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
C. Inspect roll materials on site to verify acceptance. I
•
• D. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures. 1
•
E. • Do not store roll goods on end.
•
. 1.09 EXTRA STOCK 111
A. Provide 10 lineal feet of each color of wall covering.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
•
2.01 MATERIALS - VINYL WALLCOVERING 1
A. Vinyl Wall Covering: Fabric roll stock, conforming to the following: I
1. Total Weight: 21 oz. /lin. yd.
• 2. Fabric: Scrim
3. Vinyl Weight: 18 oz. lin. yd. .
4. Roll Width: 54 inches .
5. Breaking Strength: 70 x 65
6. Tear Strength: 37 x 27 4
•
7. Pattern: "Muratone" by Koroseal.
I
8. Federal Specification: CCC -W -408 Type II
9. Vinyl Backing: Apply vinyl backing to fabric.
10. UL Rating ASTM E -84 Tunnel Test, Class A
I 11. Color: Refer to Section 09001 — Interior Finish Legend.
B. • Vinyl Wall Covering: Fabric roll stock, conforming to the following:
1. Total Weight: 20 oz. /lin. yd. I
2. Fabric: Scrim
3. Backing: Osnaburg
4. Roll Width: 54 inches
I
5. Breaking Strength: 70 x 65
•
6. Tear Strength: 37 x 27
•
7. Pattern: "Yoshi" by Colour and Design.
8. Federal Specification: CCC -W -408 Type II
I
9. Vinyl Backing: Apply vinyl backing to fabric.
10. UL Rating • ASTM E -84 Tunnel Test, Class A
11. Color: Refer to Section 09001 — Interior Finish Legend. 1
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. .
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09950 -2
i
Punted 3 2.2005
. SECTION 09950
WALL COVERINGS
PART 3 EXECUTION •
3.01 DELIVERY OF GOODS
' A. Turn fabric over to Sections listed in Part I for installation.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Wall Covering:
1. Fill cracks and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smooth.
' 2. Remove electrical, telephone, wall plates and covers. •
3. .Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and
ensure full bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tight.
•
C. Horizontal seams are not acceptable.
D. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within inches of external corners.
E. Install wall covering before installation of bases, cabinets, hardware, or items attached to or
spaced slightly from wall surface. Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch below top of
P
resilient base.
F. Where � wall covering tucks into door frame reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops, apply
covering with contact adhesive within 6 inches of wall covering termination. Ensure full contact
1 bond.
G. Remove excess wet adhesive from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. Wipe
1 clean with dry cloth.
3.04 CLEANING •
1 A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants.
B. Replace wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this Section.
END OF SECTION
1
•
1
•
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09950 -3
Printed 3 2•005
SECTION 10120
TACKSURFACES
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
1 Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
1 A. Vinyl covered Tacksurfaces.
1.03 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 09950 - Wall Covering: Supply of wall covering for tacksurfaces.
1.04 . RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Blocking and framing for markerboards, tackboards and
'
tacksurfaces. .
B. Section 09001 — Interior Finish Legend: Colors for wall coverings applied to tacksurface.
' 1.05 REFERENCES
A. • ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard.
B. APA - American Plywood Association.
C. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1 1.06 SUBMITTALS
' . A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data:
' 1. Submit product data for panel core materials.
C. Shop Drawings:
•
1. Submit shop drawings which indicate location, panel sizes, and anchorage of
tacksurfaces. See Drawings for locations of tacksurface.
D. Samples: Submit 8 inch square units of each panel core material.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform Work of this Section who has
' specialized in installing fabric covered tacksurface panels similar to those required for this Project.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
' A. Protect vinyl covered tacksurface panels from moisture in shipment, storage and handling.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL PHASE III CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10120 -1
Printed 3 22005
•
•
SECTION 10120
TACKSURFACES
•
•
1
'1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS •
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not begin installation until spaces for fabric covered tacksurface
panels have been enclosed and maintained at approximately the same temperature and humidity
conditions as planned for occupancy.
B. Maintain minimum 60 degrees Fahrenheit temperature and 35 to 65 percent humidity for 48 hours
after installation. -
C. Field Measurements: Check actual wall surfaces by accurate field measurements before
fabrication.
•
PART 2 PRODUCTS
•
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S
A. Jasco Manufacturing
B. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. 1
C. Greensteel, Inc.
D. Lemco Corp. I
E. Nelson Adams
• F. Sabin Sound Products
G. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 MATERIALS
•
A. Panel Substrate: 1
1. Composition: Mineral Fiber.
2. Treatments: Factory protection against rot, fungi and moisture absorption.
3. Density 16 to 30 pounds per cubic foot
• 4. Thickness: % inch.
5. Size: Maximum 48 inches wide by height required to fabricate seamless panels to
indicated height, refer to drawings.
6. Edge Treatment: Square.
7. Fire rating: Class A.
8. Fiberboard: ASTM C -208, cellulosic, dry type, Class A rated.
B. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer for vinyl fabric supplied under Section 09950 —
Wall Covering.
C. Vinyl Fabric: Refer to Sections 09000 — Interior Finish Legend and 09950 — Wall Coverings.
2.03 FABRICATION '
• A. Fabricate panels to sizes and configurations as shown on drawings.
• 1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS II
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10120 -2
Printed 32 2005 •
SECTION 10120
TACKSURFACES
B. Attach vinyl fabric facing to cores to produce installed panels with visible surfaces fully covered
• and free from waves in weave, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams and adhesive or foreign matter.
' C. Edge wrap vinyl fabric facing around edge of tacksurface vertically for butt joint and exposed
perimeter edges. Install in 48 inch maximum width by full height of panels. Vertical joints only,
• no horizontal joints allowed, except as shown on drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
' 3.01 PREPARATION
' A. Examine substrates with installer present for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fabric covered tacksurface panels. Do
not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
. 3.02 INSTALLATION •
•
A. Installation quality.
Install tacksurface panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb,
with top edges level and in alignment with other panels.
2. Scribe panels to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. Tuck vinyl
1 fabric facing back into joint and fix in place with adhesive if required.
B. Installation of vinyl fabric covered tacksurface panels.
1. Apply adhesive to walls and panels or in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Set tacksurface panel on wall and secure with 6D finish nails to hold in place until
adhesive cures.
3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
• A. Remove all finish nails holding panels in place after manufacturer recommended curing period.
' B. Clean panels upon completion of installation to remove dust or foreign materials from the fabric,
using dry brush, a vacuum or both.
C. Maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the Manufacturer and Installer that ensures that the
tacksurface panels are without damage or deterioration at the time of substantial completion.
D. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner acceptable to the Architect, prior
to the time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10120 -3
Printed 3.3 2005
1 SECTION 10400
• IDENTIFYING DEVICES
•
1
PART 1 GENERAL
•
I 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
I other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 .SECTION INCLUDES
1 A. Interior signage.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
I A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Blocking wall for attachment of signage.
1.04 . REFERENCES ,
A. Americans with Disability Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) - Federal Register - Rules and •
i • Regulations. .
•
B. State of Oregon Structural Specialty & Fire and Life Safety Code.
g P tY Y
I 1.05 SUBMITTALS
P . A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1.
B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's construction details relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes for each type of sign
1 required.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for fabrication and erection of signs. Include
I plans, elevations, and large-scale of typical members and other components.
Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details.
1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large -scale details of
I 2. wording and layout of lettering.
Provide on submittal a blank space for each sign scheduled below such that the
Owner can edit room names and numbers prior to fabrication of signage. Do
not fabricate until revisions made by Architect and/or Owner have been
corrected and a final approved list of signage text is completed.
3. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other.
I anchors to be installed as a unit of work in other sections.
•
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 A. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide lighting fixtures and electrical components for
illuminated signs that are labeled and listed by UL and comply with applicable NEMA
standards.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate type of sign required, obtain signs from
g P Y P YP g 9 � g
one source from a single manufacturer.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10400 -1
Printed 3'72005
•
•
SECTION 10400
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
1
C. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
signs. Other signs with deviations from indicated dimensions and profiles may be
considered, provided deviations do not change the design concept. The burden of proof
of equality is on the proposer.
1.07 • PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and
fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop
drawings. Coordination fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
•
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Sign Types 1 to 3: Specifications are based on Andco Industries Corp., ADA 850 -8 Series.
.Subject to compliance with requirements and properties of the products specified, products by the
• following manufacturers will be considered:
1. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. •
2. Best Manufacturing Company.
3. Charleston Industries, Inc.
4. Mohawk Sign. Systems.
5. Poblocki & Sons, Inc.
6, The Supersine Company.
7. Signs Northwest
•
2.02 FABRICATION
A. General: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thickness, finishes, colors, designs, 1
shapes, sizes, and details of construction.
1. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under
installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally.
2. Text shall be positioned at top, left of signs without symbols. •
3. Text shall be centered at top of signs, with symbol centered.
4. Grade 2 Braille may be engraved into plaque, or raised Braille plate welded to recessed
window in fact of the plaque. Braille color shall match background color. Center Braille
at bottom of the plaque.
B. Sign Types 1 -3: - Plaque face; optically correct, clear acrylic, 1/16" thick. Comply with ADA.
1
1. Raised Copy: Machine -cut copy characters from matte - finished opaque acrylic sheet and
chemically weld onto' the acrylic sheet forming sign panel face. Produce precisely
formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks.
2. Specified color shall be reverse (subsurface) printed on plaque face.
3. Plaque face shall be laminated to 1/8" thick opaque acrylic base.
4. Text, precision cut, 1/32" minimum thickness, 5/8 high, white, upper case Helvetica
medium style, shall be chemically welded to face of plaque.
5. Edge Condition: Beveled.
6. Corner Condition: Corners rounded, '/ inch radius.
•
1
02054 • TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10400 -2 I
Printed 3 %7'2005
1 SECTION 10400 -
IDENTIFYING DEVICES .
11 •
• 2.03 SIGN TYPES
1 A. Type 1: ADA text and Braille, size: 8" x 8 ".
B. Type 2: ADA text, Braille and International Accessibility Symbol (IAS) as shown in schedule,
: 1 size: 8" x 8 ". -
C. Type 3: ADA text and Braille, 3" x 8" use for room number identification.
1
PART 3 EXECUTION
I 3.01 INSTALLATION
• A. Signage: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Height shall be in
accordance with ADA regulations and as approved by Architect.
B. Office and Classroom Signage: Apply flush against wall surface using pressure sensitive tape by
III 3M Company or as approved by sign manufacturer.
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
1 A. At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by Owner.
01 3.03 SCHEDULE
A. Provide sign types with text as scheduled below.
1 ROOM USE DISTRICT ROOM NAME SIGN TYPE TEXT / ROOM REMARKS SYMBOL
401 TBD Office 1 • - - -
I 402 . TBD • CE2 1 - - -
I . 403 TBD Office 1 - - -
404 TBD Office 1 • - - -
1 405 TBD Classroom 1 -
406 TBD Electrical Equipment 3 - - -
415 TBD Transitions 3 - - -
1
END OF SECTION
1 .
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
I MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10400 -3
Printed 3'7%2005
i SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
1
PART 1 ; GENERAL
1 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
1 .
. other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES .
1 A: Toilet and washroom accessories: .
•
B. .. Attachment hardware. .
1 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
•
I A. Section . 01010 Summary of Work: Toilet Accessories, supplied by Owner, installed by
Contractor (FOIC).
I B. Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System: Wall Substrate.
C. Section 06112 Framing and Sheathing: In wall blocking for support.
1 D. Section 09100 Metal Support Systems: Interior Wall Framing.
p
E. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Wall Substrate.
F. Section 10170 Plastic Toilet Compartments: Attachment to panels. .
I 1.04 REFERENCES
A. ADA Accessibility Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines
for. Buildings and Facilities. .
1 B. ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold - Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
I C. ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
D. ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus
I Chromium.
E. • ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat - Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
1 F. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
L05 SUBMITTALS
. 1 A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment
1
methods.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
I 02034 TIGAR.D HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10800 -1
1 Printed 32.2003
SECTION 10800 .
• TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
•
1
•
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Install work in conformance with ADA Accessibility Standards. 1
•
1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and I
reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
•
2.01 MANUFACTURERS • 1
A. Toilet and Bath Accessories:
1. Bobrick.
2. Bradley Corp.
3. McKinney /Parker.
4. American Specialties
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366.
B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304.
C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.
D. • Adhesive: Contact type, waterproof.
E. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamperproof. 1
F. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for
component and substrate. 1
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. 1
•
B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints.
C. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.
D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. 1
E. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
- MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10800 -2
Printed 3 2 2005 1
•
SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
F. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
G. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices.
2.04 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Galvanizing: ASTM A386 to 1.25 oz /sq yd.
B. • Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.
•
C. - Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, Type SC -2 satin finish.
•
D. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish.
•
PART 3 ' EXECUTION •
3.01 EXAMINATION •
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
1 B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
•
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site at appropriate time for building -in.
B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required.
C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
•
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
1 B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
•
C. Provide additional 2x blocking and 5/8 inch Type X gypsum board behind and around
1 components to maintain fire rating for cabinets installed in rated walls.
3.04 SCHEDULE
A. Toilet Room Grab Bar (GB -1 and GB -2): Furnish Bobrick No. B -6806 Series, Type 304 stainless
steel 1 -1/2 inch o.d. satin finish grab bars in toilet rooms, of lengths and shapes shown, and
' mounting conditions as required for wall construction on which they are mounted. GB -1 36
inches long, GB -2 — 42 inches long.
B. Framed Mirrors: Furnish framed laminated glass mirrors conforming to material and construction
provisions of Fed. Spec. DD- M- 0411(1), Class 2, Style E, of sizes shown; Bobrick Model B -2909
Series, with satin finish, stainless steel frames and theft resistant concealed hanger, sizes as shown
on Drawings.
' 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE II1 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10800 -3
• Printed 3 2 2005
•
SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES •
•
1
C. Sanitary Napkin Dispenser (SND): Furnished by Owner, installed by Contractor (FOIC).
D. Soap Dispenser (SD): Furnished by Owner, installed by Contractor (FOIC). One at each sink and
lavatory.
E. Surface- mounted electric hand dryer. Provide Bobrick #B -708, 115V AC 20 amp, 2300 Watts;
with electronic sensor control. Mount at locations shown on drawings at 38- inches above finish
floor..
F. - Paper Towel Dispenser (PT): Furnished by Owner, installed by Contractor (FOIC).
G. Toilet Paper Dispenser (TP): Furnished by Owner, installed by Contractor (FOIC). Locate one at •
each toilet fixture.
•
H. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser (SC): Satin stainless steel, dispenses 250 single and half fold toilet
seat covers. Bobrick B221. Provide at locations shown on drawings. •
•
I. Stainless Steel Shelf: 18 -8 (Type 302) 18 gage stainless steel shelf similar to Bobrick "Model
No. B- 295," satin finished, 8 inches wide, 36 inch length. Provide at locations shown on
drawings.
•
J. Towel Hooks: Furnish bright, polished, stainless steel towel hook, similar to Bobrick's B -677.
Provide (1) at each shower stall shown on drawings.
K. Folding Shower Seat (FSS): Furnish stainless steel brackets and solid phenolic slats, similar to
Bobrick's B5171. Provide (1) at each accessible shower shown on drawings:
L. Shower Grab Bar: Furnish Bobrick No. B-6861 (SGB), stainless steel 1 1/2 inch outside diameter
•
satin finish grab bar in showers, mounting as required for wall construction on which they are
mounted.
M. Shower Curtain Rod: 20 gage, type 304 stainless steel satin finish, 1 inch diameter, chrome plated
with concealed wall brackets. Bobrick B -207. Provide (1) at Room 510.
N. Vinyl Shower Curtain: Opaque matte white vinyl, .008 inch thick complete with nickel plated
hooks. Bobrick 204 -2. Provide (1) at Room 510.
END OF SECTION
•
• 1
•
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10800 -4
Primed; 22005
•
• SECTION 12512
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
Division I- General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Horizontal slat louver blinds.
•
B. Operating hardware.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
1 A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Installation of wall opening head support.
B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Substrate for attachment of blinds.
. C. • Section 08410 - Aluminum Storefront: Substrate for attachment of blinds.
1.04 REFERENCES
•
A. FS AA -V -00200 - Venetian Blinds.
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION '
A. Horizontal metal slat louver blinds installed at window openings, manual control of raising and
j lowering by.cord; blade angle adjustable by control wand.
—" 1.06 SUBMITTALS
•
A. ,Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Submit shop drawings indicating opening sizes, tolerances required, installation of blinds at
window opening, method of attachment, clearances, and operation.
C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
1 D. Submit product data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics, operating features, and
mounting details.
E. ., Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300.
F. Submit two samples four inches long illustrating slat materials and finish, manufacturer's full line
of colors, cord and rod type and color.
G. • Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
H. Contract Closeout:
1. Submit maintenance and cleaning data under provisions of Section 01700.
2. Include recommended cleaning methods and cleaning materials.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
' MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 12512-1
Printed 3 /7/05
•
SECTION 12512
•
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Venetian Blinds: FS AA -V- 00200. • ( �
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING • 1
•
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver blinds wrapped and crated in a manner to prevent damage to components or marring of
surfaces.
C. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
D. Store in a clean, dry area, laid flat and blocked off ground to prevent sagging, twisting, or
• warping. 1
• 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish ten additional slats as extra stock for each size of blind.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Bali "Classics"
• B. Hunter - Douglas
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Louver Slats: One inch wide; 0.008 inch thick spring tempered prefinished aluminum horizontal
slats, with manufacturing burrs removed; radiused slat comers, unperforated. '
B. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene, ladder configuration.
C. Head Rail Housing: Prefinished, "U" shaped 1" high x 1 -1/2" wide formed aluminum box, '
internally fitted with hardware, pulleys and bearings for blind operation.
D. Cord: Braided nylon, continuous loop, free end. 1
E. Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic, hexagonal shape.
F. Head Support Bracket: Overhead head rail housing attachment.
G. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer.
H. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of minimum 54 standard colors.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 12512 -2
Primed 3/7/05
SECTION 12512 •
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work.
' B. Do not commence fabrication until field measurements are confirmed.
C. Ensure structural supports are correctly placed.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
• B. Secure in place with concealed fasteners.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch.
B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 01700.
.3.06 SCHEDULE •
A. Provide horizontal louver blinds at all interior relites (new and existing) and interior doors
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J • 12512-3
Printed 3/7/05
:1
SECTION 15050 .
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
• 1 PART 1 - GENERAL
•
1.01 DESCRIPTION
I
A. Requirements Included: Provide all materials, labor and equipment required to install complete
mechanical work.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, standards and
specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code.
t, 2. State of Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code.
3. State of Oregon Plumbing Specialty Code.
4. State of Oregon Uniform Fire Code.
1 5. NFPA and other Standards referenced in the above codes.
B. Permits, Licenses, Fees, and Taxes: Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, fees and taxes
applicable to this project as required by law.
1 C. Drawings: Do not scale drawings for roughing -in measurements, nor use as shop drawings. Make
field measurements and prepare shop drawings as required. Coordinate work with shop drawings
of other specification divisions.
', D. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and
operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications, especially the electrical drawings, to determine
voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections provided. Provide all necessary field
wiring and devices from the point of connection indicated on the electrical drawings. All
01 equipment shall be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code and the equipment's UL
listing. Bring to the attention of the Architect in writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and/or
discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered.
I 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Installation Submittals: Clearly indicate which model, size, style, and options are to be provided.
Submit all equipment submittals bound together in groups. Deliver all at one time. Clearly
indicate which model, size, style and options are to be provided. Arrangement of mechanical
equipment has been based on items of specific manufacturer intended as somewhat typical of
several makes which may be approved.
I
B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit complete wiring diagrams showing field- installed wiring and devices
for all equipment requiring same.
I C. Submittal Review: Comply with the contract documents where deviations, discrepancies, and
conflicts between the submittals and the contract documents are discovered prior to or after the
review process.
I D. Project Record (As- Installed) Drawings:
1. Obtain and pay for reproducible drawings or electronic media from Architect.
2. Keep Drawings clean, undamaged, and up to date.
3. Record and accurately indicate the following:
I a. Depths, sizes, and locations of all buried and concealed piping.
b. Locations of all clean -outs.
c. Changes, additions, and revisions due to change orders, obstructions, etc.
I Eradicate extraneous information.
d. Locations of tracer wire terminal points.
4. Make Drawings available when requested by Architect for review.
I
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 111 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050 -1
Printed 3/2/2005
1
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
5. Submit as part of the required Project Closeout documents. Final submittal will be in the
form of reproducible drawings.
6. Quality of entire set of project record drawings to match the quality of the contract
documents; quality to be judged by Architect. Computer -aided design drafting (CADD) i
shall be used to complete project record drawings. Use standards set in contract
documents. Note field modifications, all addenda and change order items on project
record drawings. If deficiencies are found in either the quality or the accuracy of the
drawings, they will be returned unapproved. Additional review of subsequent
submissions shall be at the contractor's expense.
E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit three (3) sets of Operating and Maintenance 1
Instructions, including manufacturer's service data, wiring diagrams and parts lists for all major
items of equipment, valve charts, balancing data, final control diagrams showing final set points,
and any additional equipment added by change order, bound in three -ring, vinyl or canvas covered,
loose -leaf binders organized with index and thumb -tab markers for each classification of
equipment or data. Comply with provisions of Section 01700 where applicable to the mechanical
work.
F. Record Drawings once approved shall be placed at:
1. District archives.
2. District operation and maintenance department.
3. The school; laminate this set.
G. Instruction Manual: Submit separate Instruction Manual 30 days prior to scheduling the required
Instruction Period. Include the following:
1. Description of each system and operational sequences.
2. Seasonal system adjustments.
3. Description and normal settings for time clocks, thermostats, fan and other motor
switches, etc.
�..O_.....a, valve ,.../ +. i�v.u iv. settings. 'i
5. Emergency measures upon system failure.
6. Cross reference information furnished by manufacturer in the Operating and Maintenance
Manual above. III II
7. Operation and maintenance manual once approved shall be placed at:
a. District archives.
b. District operation and maintenance department.
c. The school.
8. Provide laminated control drawings and wiring diagrams at each mechanical system (i.e.
air handler, boiler, etc.) if not provided under 15900.
1
1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver to project site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible.
B. Handling: Avoid damage.
C. Storage: Inside protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Where necessary to store
outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1
2.01 GENERAL
A. General: Provide all new materials and equipment, identical to apparatus or equipment in
successful operation for a minimum of two years. Provide materials of comparable quality omitted
here but necessary to complete the work. Maximum allowable variation from stated capacities,
minus 5% to plus 10% as approved in each case.
B. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other portions of the work and provide 1
products with the proper or correct power and fuel- burning characteristics, and similar adaptations
for the project.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 111— CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050 -2
Printed 3/2/2005
1
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METI -IODS
I
C. Equipment scheduled by performance or model number shall be considered the basis of the design.
If equipment of other specified manufacturer's provided in lieu of the design equipment the
contractor is responsible for all changes and costs which may be necessary to accommodate this
equipment, including different sizes and locations for connections, different electrical
characteristics, different dimensions, different access requirements or any other differences which
impact the project.
1 2.02 DRIVES •
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dayton, Gates, Browning.
I
B. General: "V" section belt drives, multiple as required, sized on 1.5 times installed motor
horsepower. Provide standard slide rails or approved means of adjustment for each motor with
belt drive. Use standard section belts and no sheave smaller than cataloged industry standard;
provide countersunk center on shaft ends to receive speed counter tip. Variable pitch sheaves are
approved only for initial balancing on variable frequency driven fans. Final drives must be fixed
sheave. Coordinate installation with balancer.
2.03 ACCESS. PANELS
A. Manufacturers: Milcor, Bilco, Elmdor, Karp, Potter - Roemer or accepted substitute. Milcor Style
DW, K, or M panels as required by construction.
` B. Construction: Fire rated in.fire rated partitions and ceilings. Provide flush key cylinder locks on
• all access panels less than 8' above the floor. Turn keys over to owners at project completion.
Screwdriver latches on all others.
1 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL
A. General: Provide all steel as required for adequate support of all mechanical equipment, standard
angle or channel, I or H sections as required by application. Provide shop drawings of supports
PI especially constructed for this project. Adequately cross braced and welded pipe stands may be
used for supports. Provide suitable base plates for all stands and anchors for all hanging
equipment. Drill or burn support holes in center line of web of structural shapes only, and in only
one leg of any one angle, and as far from center of length as possible.
1 ' B. Paint: Apply one coat of black Rustoleum primer to shop fabricated items before delivery to job;
other painting as specified herein.
2.05 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS
A. Pipe Markers:
I 1. See Chart Below:
PIPE DIAMETER LETTER SIZE
with insulation
1 3 /4" through 2- '/4" 3 4"
2 - ' /2" through 7- 7/8" 1- 3 /4"
8" through 10" 2- ''/2"
Over 10" 3 -'/2"
PIPE COLOR
background
Acid vent Yellow
1 Acid Waste Yellow
Air Blue
Boiler Blowdown Yellow
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050 -3
Printed 3 /2/2005
1
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Boiler Feed Yellow
Boiler Feedwater Yellow
Chilled Water Return Green
Chilled Water Supply Green
Cold Water Green ,'
Condensate Yellow
Condensate Drain Yellow .1
Condensate Return Yellow •
Condenser Water Return Green
Condenser Water Supply Green
• Deionized Water Green
Domestic Cold Water Green
Domestic Hot Water Yellow •
Domestic Hot Water Yellow
Recirculation
Fire Sprinkler Red '
Heating Water Return • Yellow
Heater Water Supply Yellow
Heating Water Reverse Return Yellow
• 140° Hot Water Yellow
Natural Gas Yellow "
Refrigerant Liquid Yellow
41
Refrigerant Suction Yellow
Sanitary Drain Green
Steam Yellow
Storm Drain Green
Sump Pump Discharge Yellow •
Tempered Water Yellow
Vacuum Yellow
Vent Yellow '
2. Provide direction arrows on all lines. •
B. . Nameplates:
1. Engraved nameplates, 1/16" thick, laminated 3 -ply plastic, center ply white, outer ply
black, letters formed by exposing center ply.
2. Size: 3" by 5" nameplates with 1/4" high letters. II
C. Valve tags: 1
1. Tag to identify what valve is. Example (Hot water shut -off valve for restroom 100 &
101).
2. Numbered brass tags referring to a valve chart are not acceptable.
3. Provide engraved plastic or laminated plastic tags with chain attachment. 1
I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050 -4
Printed 3/2/2005
.1
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
III
2.06. PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING
1 A. Through - penetration fire stopping system tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories. 3M,
Metacaulk, SpecSeal, or approved.
•
B. Select system for proper application based on wall construction, type of penetrating item, wall
1 rating, etc.
. PART 3 - EXECUTION
g 3.01 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION
A. Site Examination: Before starting work, carefully examine site and all contract Drawings.
Become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing work on this project. Verify all indicated
I
elevations, building measurements, roughing -in dimensions and equipment locations before •
proceeding with any of the work.
B. Utility Locations: The location of all utilities, wires, conduits, pipes, ducts, or other service
facilities are shown in a general way only on the Drawings and are taken from existing public
records. Ascertain whether any additional facilities other than those shown on the plans may be
present and determine the exact location and elevations of all utilities prior to commencing
II
installation.
C. Sleeves, Inserts, Cast -in -Place Work: Provide sleeves, inserts, anchoring devices, cast -in -place
work, etc. which must be set in concrete sequenced at the proper time for the project schedule.
1 D. Coordination:
1. Where the work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into the
available space, prepare accurate scale shop drawings showing the actual physical
dimensions required for the installation and submit prior to purchase- fabrication-
installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination.
2. Cooperate with other trades in furnishing material and information for sleeves, bucks,
chases, mountings, backing, foundations and wiring required for installation of
I mechanical items.
3. Coordinate all work with other trades and determine in advance where interfacing of the
mechanical work and other work are required to be connected together. Provide all
_ materials and equipment to make those connections. Submit shop drawings showing
required connections where special conditions exist.
E. Discrepancies: Report immediately any error, conflict or discrepancy in Plans, Specifications
and /or existing conditions. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification
I of same has been made. Should rearrangement or re- routing of ducts or piping be necessary,
provide for approval the simplest layout possible for that particular portion of the work.
F. Related Engineering Services: The cost for all professional engineering services related to
Division 15 items of work shall be included in the bid, and will be paid for by the General
Contractor. References to "structural engineer" in Division 15 do not refer to the project structural
engineer of record, unless that individual or firm is retained (independently) by the general
contractor to perform Division 15 consulting services."
I 3.02 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING
A. Provide all mechanical equipment motors, automatic temperature, limit, float and similar control
devices required, with wiring complete from power source indicated on Electrical Drawings.
B. Provide properly rated motor overload and undervoltage protection and all manual or automatic
motor operating devices for all mechanical equipment.
I C. Equipment and systems shown on the Drawings and /or specified, are based upon requirements of
specific manufacturers which are intended as somewhat typical of several makes which may be
approved. Provide all field wiring and /or devices necessary for a complete and operable system
1 including controls for the actual selected equipment/system.
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050 -5
Printed 3/2/2005
•
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
1
D. Provide all starters for mechanical motors. Review Electrical Specifications and Drawings to
determine which mechanical motor starters will be provided under the Electrical Specification i
Sections and provide all others. 1
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Locating and Positioning Equipment: Observe all Codes, Regulations and good common practice
in locating and installing mechanical equipment and material so that completed installation
presents the least possible hazard. Maintain adequate clearances for repair and service to all
equipment and comply with Code requirements. •
B. Arrangement: Arrange ductwork and piping parallel with primary lines of the building II
construction, and with a minimum of 7' overhead clearance in all areas where possible. Unless
indicated otherwise, conceal all piping and ductwork. Locate operating and control equipment
properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire mechanical work with adequate access for
operation and maintenance. Give right -of -way to piping which must slope for drainage. Set all
equipment level or as recommended by manufacturer. Under no conditions shall beams, girders,
footings or columns be cut for mechanical items. Casting of pipes into concrete is prohibited
unless so shown 011 Drawings.
C. Anchorage: Anchor and/or brace all mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork to resist
displacement due to seismic action, include snubbers on equipment mounted on spring isolators.
D. Access Panels: Provide access panels with proper backing reinforcement for all equipment, fire
and smoke dampers, dielectric unions and valves requiring service and installed above ceilings,
behind walls, or in furring, complete with correct frame for type of building construction involved.
Exact size, number and location of access panels are not necessarily shown on Drawings. Use no
panel smaller than 12" by 12" for simple manual access or smaller than 16" x 20" where personnel
must pass through.
E. Adjusting: Adjust and calibrate all automatic mechanical equipment, mixing valves, flush valves, isA
. float devices, etc. Adjust flow rates at each piece of equipment or fixture.
III
F. Building Vapor Barrier: Wherever the building insulation vapor barrier is penetrated by
mechanical piping, hangers, conduits, ductwork, etc., provide clear self - adhesive tape
recommended by the insulation manufacturer around the penetrations.
G. Mechanical System Identification:
1. Piping System: Indicate each pipe system by its generic name (abbreviated) as
shown/scheduled /specified; except vent and drainage piping. Comply with UMC
Standard 11 -2 / ANSI A13.1 for marker locations, letter sizes, and colors. Include arrows
to show direction of flow and "Electric Traced" signs to identify heat cable wrapped
piping.
2. Valve Identification: Tag all valves as directed previously.
3. Equipment: Provide engraved plastic - laminate signs at locations of major equipment,
primary control devices, emergency equipment, dangerous elements of the mechanical •
work and similar places. Provide text of sufficient clarity and lettering, of sufficient size
to convey adequate information at each location, and permanently mount in an
appropriate and effective location. For systems with multiple rooftop HVAC units,
comply with OMSC 304.5. Comply with recognized industry standards for color and
design.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect all work and materials against loss or damage. Close all pipe openings with caps or plugs.
At final completion, thoroughly clean and deliver all work and equipment in an unblemished new
condition. Keep all motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of
installation.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE HI — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050 -6
Printed 3 /2/2005
;i •
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
B. Protect floors, walls, framing and sheathing where pipe cutting and threading operations are
conducted with plastic sheeting under plywood sheets. Extend plastic sheeting beyond the
I
plywood. Clean -up metal cuttings, oil, etc., daily or as necessary to prevent debris from being
tracked beyond the protected area. Damages, as determined by the Architect, due to the pipe
cutting/threading operation shall be repaired by the responsible trade.
I
3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 1 for the cutting and patching of other work to
accommodate the installation of mechanical work. Do all necessary cutting and patching of
I existing building and yard surfaces required for completion of the mechanical work. Patch to
match finish and color of adjacent surfaces. Coordinate work in remodel and new areas to avoid
cutting of new finished surfaces.
I 3.06 PIPE PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING
A. Install as recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with the product's UL listing. Below
are the minimum installation requirements.
1. Install specified penetrating item(s) with required annular spacing in proper size wall or
floor opening. Support penetrating item(s) adequately on both sides of construction.
2. Clean all opening and penetrating item surfaces in penetration area to remove loose
debris, dirt, oil, wax, grease, old caulking, etc.
3. If needed or required for gypsum or concrete block walls, install specified galvanized
steel wire mesh or sleeve recessed and centered inside wall around penetrating item(s) so
that it is snug against perimeter of opening.
I 4. When required, install specified type and depth of backing material in annular space,
recessed to required fill depth of fire stopping caulking.
5. Gun, trowel, and/or pump fire stopping sealant to specified depth in annular space around
penetrating item(s). Trowel sealant surfaces flush with wall or floor surfaces to a smooth,
p defect -free finish. Where required, apply specified size caulking bead around penetrating
item(s) at zero annular contact areas and tool smooth.
3.07 , EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
I A. All removed mechanical equipment is the property of the Contractor unless indicated otherwise,
see `D' below. Disconnect and remove all such equipment from the project property. Cap all
piping in walls, below floors, and/or above ceilings in finished rooms.
I B. Disable electrical circuits by disconnection of both ends and make safe with wire nuts or other
approved methods. Remove conduit to concealed locations. Remove wire to panel or j -box if
circuit is used for other devices.
I C. Reused Equipment: Reconnect piping, wiring and/or controls to restore original equipment
functions unless indicated otherwise.
D. Rooftop units and Carrier control modules and cabinets are to be delivered to Tigard - Tualatin
i School District maintenance headquarters in the same condition as found on site. Coordinate with
Tigard- Tualatin School District for an inspection of all rooftop units and Carrier control modules.
Document condition prior to construction beginning. Any damage or loss to be reimbursed by
contractor to Tigard - Tualatin School District at market value determined by Carrier Corporation
I representative.
3.08 MECHANICAL PAINTING
A. Minimum Requirements: Comply with minimum requirements of Section 09900, Painting. All
mechanical equipment, piping, insulation, etc., exposed in finished areas, storage rooms and other
locations except mechanical equipment rooms will be painted under Section 09900.
1 B. Painting Materials: Material shall comply with Section 09900, Painting.
C. Uninsulated Piping: Paint black or galvanized uninsulated piping located buried in ground, in
concrete or masonry one (1) coat acid- resisting black paint. Paint black or galvanized uninsulated
1 piping exposed to weather one (1) coat black asphaltum varnish.
I 02054
MAR 05 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
TIGARD — T.UALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050 -7
Printed 3/2/2005
1
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
I
D. Iron Work: Paint hangers, rods, anchors, guides, threads of galvanized pipe, bases, supports,
uncoated sheet metal and other iron work without factory finish, exposed to weather, one coat acid -
resisting black paint. Apply one (1) coat Dixon's Aluminum Graphite No. 209 paint over the (1)
coat primer as recommended by paint manufacturer to all hot metal surfaces.
E. Sheet Metal: Apply one coat of zinc chromate to mechanical sheet metal exposed to weather,
except no painting required on aluminum or stainless steel. Apply one coat of flat black paint to
the inside of unlined ducts behind all grilles and registers.
F. Insulated Piping and Other Insulated Surfaces: Paint insulated piping in half - round, split tile, or
other inaccessible locations, one (1) coat asphalt emulsion.
3.09 TEMPORARY HEATING AND COOLING
A. Comply with requirements of Section 01500.
B. Permanent mechanical systems' equipment utilized for temporary heating, ventilating and cooling
shall be started with all controls and safeties installed and operational. Start-up shall be done by a
factory approved mechanic only. ,
C. Owner's warranties shall not be abridged by contractor's use of the permanent systems' equipment
prior to final acceptance. Warranty period shall begin at final completion.
Warranty maintenance to be included. ;I
3.10 MECHANICAL WORK CLOSEOUT
A. General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. Calibrate all
equipment requiring same.
B. Record Drawings: Submit record set of drawings as previously specified in this Section. Iiii-
C. Closeout Equipment/Systems Operations: Sequence operations properly so that work of project .‘
will not be damaged or endangered. Coordinate with seasonal requirements. Operate each item of
equipment and each system in a test run of appropriate duration with the Architect present, and
with the Owner's operating personnel present, to demonstrate sustained, satisfactory performance.
Adjust and correct operations as required for proper performance. Clean and lubricate each
system, and replace dirty filters, excessively worn parts and similar expendable items of the work.
D. Operating Instructions: Conduct a full walk- through instruction seminar for the Owner's personnel
who are to be involved in the continued operation and maintenance of mechanical equipment and
systems. Provide written instructions outlining and explaining the identification system,
operational diagrams, emergency and alarm provisions, sequencing requirements, seasonal
provisions, security, safety, efficiency and similar features of the systems. See Section 15900 for
control operating instruction requirements. Video tape or otherwise record the training session for
future playback. Provide three copies (one each with O &M material).
END OF SECTION
I
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE Ill — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050 -8
Printed 3 /2/2005
;1
SECTION 15060
PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS
•
111
j, PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
1 A. Provide pipe, pipe fittings and related items required for complete piping system.
B. Related Work: Specified in Section 15090, Supports and Anchors, and in Section 15100, Valves.
-I 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: ASTM and ANSI Standards are indicated. In addition, special standards are referenced
where neither ASTM nor ANSI Standards are applicable.
B. Concealed Plastic Piping: No concealed plastic piping inside the building unless approved by
Code or Governing Authorities.
I C. Defmitions: Where piping fluid is not indicated in the following paragraphs, provide similar
piping materials for similar fluids (i.e., "make -up water" = "domestic water "; "wet stand pipe" =
"fire sprinkler pipe "; "drainage piping" = "sanitary/storm sewer piping ").
D. Provide submittal for all piping. Leave tags and labels on piping to allow field inspection to verify
American Manufacturer.
1.03 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the project site with galvanized pipe manufacturer's labels intact and legible as
,Il required by code.
po B. Provide factory- applied end caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe -end damage and eliminate dirt and
moisture from inside of pipe and tube. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside
storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.
I I PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Copper Pipe and Tube:
1. Application:
I a. Refrigeration
b. Cooling condensate drain
2. Pipe: ASTM B88.
a. Refrigerant Piping: ANSI /ASME B31.5 or SAE J 513 -F, "Refrigeration Tube
Fittings." Where conflicts occur, B31.5 shall govern.
II 3. Refrigerant Fittings: ANSI /ASME B31.5 or SAE J 513 -F, brazed or flange joints.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS /PRODUCTS •
I A. Insulating (Dielectric) Fittings: Provide standard products recommended by the manufacturer for
use in the service indicated, and which effectively isolate ferrous from non - ferrous piping
(electrical conductance), prevent galvanic action, and reduce corrosion. Victaulic "Clear Flow."
I B. Soldering and Brazing Materials: Provide soldering materials as determined by the installer to
comply with installation requirements.
I. Tin - Antimony Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 95TA.
2. Lead -Free Solder: ASTM B32, Grade HB. Harris "Bridgit" approved.
3. Silver Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 96.5TS.
1
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 111 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15060 -1
Printed 3/3/2005
' SECTION 15060
PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices. Install
each run accurately aligned with a minimum of joints and couplings, but with adequate and
accessible unions and flanges for disassembly, maintenance and/or replacement of valves and
equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings.
3.02 PIPING JOINTS
A. General: Provide joints of the type indicated in each piping system, and where piping and joint as
manufactured form a system, utilize only that manufacturer's material.
•
B. Solder Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: In accordance with recognized industry practice. Cut tube
ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings.
Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and
solder in -a manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess
solder from joint before it hardens. "T- Drill" field formed tees may be utilized where the main is '
at least two pipe sizes larger than the branch.
C. Braze Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: Where indicated, in accordance with ANSI /ASME B31.5.
Pass a slow stream of dry nitrogen gas through the tubing at all times while brazing to eliminate
formation of copper oxide.
D. Changes in Direction: Use fittings for all changes in direction. Run lines parallel with building
surfaces.
E. Line Grades:
1. Drainage Lines: Run at maximum possible grade and in no case less than 1/4" per foot
within building
2. Vents: Pitch for drainage 1/4" per 10'.
3. Water: Pitch to low points and install hose bib drains. 3' minimum depth of ground cover
for all lines outside building unless otherwise noted. 41
4. Heating Piping: Pitch 1" to 40' minimum to low point drips or drains.
F. Unions and Flanges: At all equipment to permit dismantling and elsewhere as consistent with good
installation practice.
' G. Expansion: Provide loops, swing joints, anchors, runouts and spring pieces to prevent damage to
piping or equipment.
3.03 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING EQUIPMENT
A. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates: Chrome plated pressed steel or brass screw locked split plates on I
all pipe penetrations in finished spaces.
3.04 CLEANING i
A. General: Clean all dirt and construction dust and debris from all mechanical piping systems and
leave in a new condition. Touch up paint where necessary.
B. Refrigeration System Piping: I 1. Wipe each tube internally with a dry, lintless cloth followed with a clean lintless cloth
saturated with recommended refrigerant.
2. Repeat until the saturated cloth is not discolored by dirt.
3. Wipe with a clean cloth saturated with compressor oil and squeezed dry.
4. Wipe with a dry, lintless cloth.
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE I11 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15060 -2
Printed 3/2/2005
:1
SECTION 15060
PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS
3.09 TEST
A. General:
1. Minimum duration of two hours or longer, as directed for all tests. Furnish report of test
observation signed by qualified inspector. Make all tests before applying insulation,
backfilling, or otherwise concealing piping or connecting fixtures or equipment. Where
' part of the system must be tested to avoid concealment before the entire system is
• complete, test that portion separately, same as for entire system.
2. Provide all necessary temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges.
Remove control devices before testing and do not use piping system valves to isolate
I sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water
and pressurize for the indicated pressure and time.
3. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is
observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure.
•
B. Repair:
. 1. Repair piping system sections which fail the required piping test by disassembly and re-
installation, using new materials to the extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use
chemical stop -leak compounds, solder, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.
2. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.
C. Refrigerant System:
1. When the refrigerant connections have been completed, close the compressor suction and
discharge valves (or receiver outlet valve in the case of condensing unit) and test the
balance of the system to near operating pressure with a dry nitrogen.
' 2. Carefully test all joints, using soap and water or other sudsing solution. After all joints
are tested, discharge the gas and repair all leaks, then repeat the test with a mixture of
nitrogen and HCFC -22 and a halide torch or an electronic leak detector.
3. Evacuate the system to remove moisture and non- condensables. Lower the absolute
pressure with a vacuum pump to 1000 microns of mercury. Apply external heat as
required to vaporize moisture.
4. Dehydrate each refrigerant circuit by satisfactory use of a vacuum pump before charging
with refrigerant. Furnish all necessary refrigerant and oil for complete operating charge
of the system. Upon completion of the work of construction, test all refrigeration
equipment under normal operating conditions and leave in operating order. Adjust
automatic temperature controls.
5. After the first 24 hours of operation, measure the pressure drop across the suction filter.
If the pressure drop exceeds 5 pounds per square inch, replace the cartridge with a new
111 one, retesting and replacing the cartridge and/or adjusting the system as necessary to
- achieve a pressure drop of less than 5 pounds per square inch in 24 hours.
1
END OF SECTION
, 1
111
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15060 -3
Printed 3/2/2005
• SECTION 15090
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
1 A. The requirements of this section apply to the mechanical piping and equipment systems specified
elsewhere in these specifications.
II B. Provide pipe and equipment hangers, supports, anchors and related items for complete anchor,
hanger and support systems.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 A. Standards: The Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry
Practice SP -58 and SP -69 are referenced in this section.
•
I B. Provide factory- fabricated horizontal piping hangers, clamps, hanger rod, shields, supports, etc., of
the indicated MSS type and size.
C. Seismic Requirements: Provide seismic restraints in accordance with UBC Section 1632. Design
I restraint systems in accordance with "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical
Systems," Second Edition, 1998, SMACNA, or "A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint"
ASHRAE RP -812, 1999.
0 PART2- PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
I A. Manufacturers: B -Line, Carpenter & Paterson, Grinnell, Michigan, Superstrut or accepted
substitute.
B. Listed Types: MSS Piping Types listed with Grinnell figure numbers in parentheses where
applicable (or other manufacturers as noted).
2.02 SUPPORTS
I A. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports:
1. Adjustable Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1 (Fig. 260).
2. Adjustable Band Hanger: MSS Type 7 (Fig. 97), fabricated from steel.
I 3. Adjustable Swivel -Band Hanger: MSS Type 10 (Fig. 70).
4. Clamp: MSS Type 4 (Fig. 212, 216).
5. Double -Bolt Clamp: MSS Type 3 (Fig. 295A, 295H), including pipe spacers.
I B. Equipment and Piping Supports:
1. Channel Support System: Galvanized, 12 gauge channel and bracket support systems,
single or double channel as indicated on the Drawings or as required by piping and
equipment weights. Grinnell "Power Strut" channel. Acceptable manufacturers: Super
I 2. Strut, Globestrut, Bee, Kindorf or Unistrut.
Steel Brackets: Welded structural steel shapes complying with one of the following:
a. Light Duty: MSS Type 31 (Fig. 194).
b. Medium Duty: MSS Type 32 (Fig. 195).
I 3. c. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33 (Fig. 199).
Rooftop Pipe Stands: MIRO Industries model 24 -R or accepted substitute.
C. Vertical Pipe Clamps:
I 1. Two -Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 8 (Fig. 261).
2. Four -Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 42 include pipe spacers at inner bolt- holes.
I 02054
MAR 05 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15090 -1
Printed 3/2/2005
1
SECTION 15090
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
1
D. Hanger Rod Attachment:
1. Hanger Rod: Grinnell Fig. 140 or 146 for all sizes. Right hand threaded. I
2. Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13 (Fig. 230).
3. Weldless Eye -Nut: MSS Type, 17 (Fig. 290).
4. Malleable Eye- Socket: MSS Type 16 (Fig. 110R).
5. Clevises: MSS Type 14 (Fig. 299).
E. Building Attachments:
1. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18 (Fig. 282), steel or Grinnell Power -Strut PS349
continuous channel. Acceptable Manufacturers: Michigan Hanger, Globestrut, Unistrut,
Super Strut.
2. Clamps: MSS Type 19 (Fig. 285, 281), Type 20, 21 (Fig. 225, 226, 131), Type 23 (Fig.
86, 87, 88), Type 25 (Fig. 227), Type 27 through 30 where applicable.
F. Saddles and Shields:
1. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39 (Fig. 160).
2. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40 (Fig. 167).
3. Preinsulated Pipe Supports: Pipe Shields Inc. or accepted substitute.
a. Pipe supported on rods - Models A1000, A2000, A3000, A4000 and A9000.
b. Pipe supported on flat surfaces - Models A1000, A2000, A5000, A6000 and
A7000.
c. Pipe supported on pipe rolls - Models A3000, A4000, A5000, A6000 and
A8000.
G. Miscellaneous Hanger Materials:
1. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. '
2. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A -36.
t 3. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C -150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly
graded, natural sand (ASTM C -404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0
parts sand, by volume with only the minimum amount of water required for placement
and hydration.
4. Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for the loads required; 4
weld steel in accordance with AWS Standards.
/ 5. Pipe Guides: Provide factory- fabricated guides, of cast semi -steel or heavy fabricated
' steel, consisting of a bolted two section outer cylinder and base with a two-section
guiding spider bolted tight to the pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation
(if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of the length recommended by the manufacturer to
allow indicated travel.
6. Standard Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A.
7. Concrete Anchors: Rawl Lok/Bolt, Hilti "HSL," ITT Phillips, Red Head Wedge
Anchors, Ramset Trubolt or Dynabolt or accepted substitute.
8. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Proceed with the installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after the required
building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct
inadequacies including (but not limited to) the proper placement of inserts, anchors and other
building structural attachments.
1. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping and equipment
properly from the building structure. Use no wire or perforated metal to support piping,
and no supports from other piping or equipment. For exposed continuous pipe runs,
install hangers and supports of the same type and style as installed for adjacent similar I
piping.
2. Prevent electrolysis in the support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports
which are copper plated or by other recognized industry methods.
3. Support fire sprinkler piping independently of other piping and in accordance with NFPA
Pamphlet 13.
4. Arrange supports to prevent eccentric loading of joists and joist girders. Locate supports
at panel points only. '
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15090 -2
Printed 3/2/2005
SECTION: 15090
• SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
1
B. Provisions for Movement:
1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate the action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.
2. Install hangers and supports so that equipment and piping live and dead loading and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
I
3. Install hangers and supports to provide the indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. Comply with the following
installation requirements:
I a. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping outside the
insulated piping support. Do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31.
b. Insulated Pipe Supports: Insulated pipe supports shall be supplied and installed
on all insulated pipe and tubing.
c. Load Rating: All insulated pipe supports shall be load rated by the manufacturer
based upon testing and analysis in conformance with ASME B31.1, MSS SP -58,
MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89.
d. Support Type: Manufacturer's recommendations, hanger style and load shall
I e. determine support type.
Insulated Piping Supports: Where insulated piping with continuous vapor
barrier or where exposed to view in finished areas is specified, install hard maple
wood insulation shields (Elcen Fig. 216) or steel pipe covering protection shields
(MSS type 39) at each hanger.
C. Pipe Support:
1. Vertical Spacing: Support at base, at equivalent of every floor height (maximum 10' as
required by Code) and just below roof line.
2. Screwed or Welded Steel or .Copper Piping: Maximum hanger spacing shall be as
follows:
Steel Copper
0 1 -1/4" and smaller
1 -1/2" pipe
2" pipe
7' span 6' span
9' span 6' span
10' span 10' span
2-1/2" & larger 12' span 10' span
I 3. Install additional hangers or supports at concentrated loads such as pumps, valves, etc. to
maintain alignment and prevent sagging.
4. Support Rod: Hanger support rods sized as follows:
1 Pipe and Tube Size Rod Size
Inches mm Inches mm
1/2" to 4" 12.7 to 101.6 3/8" 9.5
5" to 8" 127.0 to 203.2 1/2" 12.7
II 10" to 12" 254.0 to 304.8 5/8" 15.9
D. Adjust hangers and supports to bring piping to proper levels and elevations. .
I E. Provide all necessary structural attachments such as anchors, beam clamps, hanger flanges and
brackets in accordance with MSS SP -69. Attachments to beams wherever possible. Supports
• suspended from other piping, equipment, metal decking, etc., are not acceptable.
II F. Horizontal banks of piping may be supported on common steel channel member spaced not more
than the shortest allowable span required on the individual pipe. Maintain piping at its relative
lateral position using clamps or clips. Allow lines subject to thermal expansion to roll axially or
slide. Size channel struts for piping weights.
1 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS
. A. Install anchors at the proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI
' B31, where recommended in SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual" or exceeding manufacturer's
recommended loading, and to prevent the transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to the piping and /or
I
equipment and to the structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and AWS standards and SMACNA
"Seismic Restraint Manual."
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15090 -3
Printed 3/2/2005
SECTION 15090
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS •
C. Bolting: Provide standard plate washers under heads and nuts of bolts bearing on wood. Soap
threads of lag bolts prior to installing.
D. Structural Blocking: Locate as indicated and as required to support mechanical piping and
equipment.
E. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with the expansion
unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to the maximums
recommended by the manufacturer of each unit.
F. Anchor Spacings: Install anchors at the ends of principal pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe
runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for presetting of anchors as required to
accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.
G. Painting: Refer to Section 15050. 1
3.03 EQUIPMENT RESTRAINTS
A. Systems and equipment shall be anchored to resist displacement, including sliding, swinging, and
overturning due to seismic forces. Friction due to equipment weight shall not be considered as
anchorage.
B. The contractor shall retain a consulting engineer or equipment manufacturer to design the seismic
restraint systems.
C. Contractor shall submit calculations and shop drawings, sealed and signed by a professional
engineer, showing seismic restraint design for all equipment weighing 400 lbs. or more and for all
piping and ductwork required to be braced. Design shall show analysis of supporting structure,
anchorages, and restraints in accordance with UBC Section 1632.
D. Seismic restraint system components shall be approved by the California Office of Statewide
Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) for fixed equipment anchorages. Acceptable
manufacturers: Mason Industries, Tolco, or approved.
•
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15090 -4
Printed 3/2/2005
SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The requirements of this section apply to the insulation of mechanical equipment specified
elsewhere in these specifications.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Insulation Thickness and Thermal Performance: Comply with Chapter 13 provisions of the State
of Oregon Structural Specialty Code.
1 B. Composite (Insulation, Jacket or Facing and Adhesives) Fire and Smoke Hazard Ratings: Not to
exceed a flame spread of 25 or smoke development of 50.
C. Component Ratings of Accessories (Adhesives, Mastics, Cements, Tapes, Finishing Cloth for
Fittings): Same as "B" requirements above and permanently treated. No water soluble. treatments.
1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. General: In addition to the requirements specified in Section 15050, the following apply:
1. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to the site in factory-
fabricated containers with the manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard
ratings of the products. Store insulation in original wrappings and protect from weather
and construction traffic.
2. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install
damaged insulation. Remove such insulation from project site.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit catalog data and performance characteristics for each product specified.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Insulating Manufacturers: Schuller, Knauf, Armstrong, Owens- Corning, Pittsburgh Corning,
Pabco, Imcoa or Certain Teed. Schuller products are listed unless indicated otherwise.
B. Adhesive Manufacturers: Benjamin Foster, 3M, Insul- Coustic, Borden, Kingco or Armstrong.
2.02 PIPING INSULATION
A. Pipe Temperatures Minus 30 to 180 Deg. F: Flexible, preformed, pre -slit, self - sealing elastomeric
pipe insulation up to 2 -1/8" ID, thermal conductivity of 0.27 BTU/hr. sq. ft. /in. at 75 deg. F and
vapor transmission rating of 0.2 perms /inch. Apply in thickness necessary to prevent
condensation on the surface at 85 deg. F and 70% RH. Armstrong "Arnaflex 2000" or, in
concealed locations, Imcoa or Nomaco also approved.
2.03 DUCT INSULATION
A. Interior Above Grade Ductwork: Glass fiber blanket with "FSK" facing, k value = 0.31 at 75 deg.
F, and UL 25/50 surface burning rating. Schuller "Microlite."
2.04 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation Compounds and Materials: Provide rivets, bands, adhesives, cements, coatings, sealers,
welded studs, - etc., as recommended by the manufacturers for the insulation and conditions
specified. No stapled jacket fastenings are acceptable.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15250 -1
Printed 3/2/2005
•
SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL INSULATION
B. Interior Tanks and Equipment Insulation Covering: Finished metal jacket or as recommended by
the manufacturer for insulation material specified.
C. PVC Protective Jacketing and Valve and Pipe Fitting Covers: Schuller Zeston 2000, Proto
LoSmoke, or Ceel -Co Ceel -Tite 100 Series with precut fitting fiberglass insulation or approved.
D. Jacket Lap Sealing Adhesives: Foster Drion 85 -75 contact cement or approved substitute.
. PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING INSULATION
A. General: Do not insulate underground piping except at joints and fittings on preinsulated piping
unless indicated otherwise.
3.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Ductwork: Insulate the following:
1. All supply ductwork.
2. All supply and return ductwork in systems routed in unconditioned spaces or exposed to
the outside conditions.
3. All outside air intake ducts.
4. All ductwork required to be insulated by code.
B. Insulation Thickness: Select board and blanket insulation of thickness required to provide the
following installed R- value.
1. All heating or cooling system supply and return ducts located on the exterior of the
insulated building envelope and all outside air intake ducts.
a. R -8: Zone 1
C. Fittings: Wire and duct adhesive as required. To prevent sagging on all rectangular or square
ducts over 24" wide, install Gramweld or equal welding pins on the bottom. Maximum spacing
18" on center in both directions.
D. Installation: Applied with butt joints, all seams sealed with vapor seal mastic or taped with 2"
wide vapor - proof, pressure- sensitive tape. Seal all penetrations with vapor barrier adhesive.
E. Internally Lined Ductwork: Where internally lined ductwork is indicated on the Drawings and/or
specified, no exterior insulation is required. Select duct lining to provide the required R- value.
Carefully lap the ends of the exterior insulation a minimum of 6" past the interior insulation unless
otherwise shown. Seal the end of vapor barrier jacket to the duct with mastic where the vapor
barrier is required. Duct lining is specified in Section 15880.
END OF SECTION
1
r
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 111— CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15250-2
Printed 3/2/2005
1
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The requirements of this section apply to the fire protection system.
B. Provide all labor and material and perform such other services necessary and reasonably incidental
to the design and installation of an automatic sprinkler and standpipe system for all areas indicated
on the Drawings and as required by the Governing Agency.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor Qualifications:
1. Established fire protection contractor regularly engaged in the design and installation of
automatic fire sprinkler systems.
2. Employ workers experienced and skilled in this trade.
3. System designer: Qualified and certified for the design of fire protection sprinkler
systems. NICET level III or IV technician or Professional Engineer experienced in the
design of sprinkler systems.
B. Governing Agency: All work in accordance with and accepted by the following hereafter referred
to Governing Agencies:
1. Fire Marshal State of Oregon.
2. Fire Marshal City of Tigard, Oregon.
C. Design Requirements:
1. Comply with the latest issue of NFPA Standard 13.
2. Modify the existing wet pipe system for remodeled areas of construction using approved
automatic devices designed particularly for use in this type of system.
3. Fire Sprinkler Coverage: As required by the Governing Agency and including fire
protection of all areas noted.
4. Occupancy Hazard: Final Occupancy Hazard designation in accordance with the
Governing Agency requirements.
5. Revisions to the Contractor's design required by the Governing Agency shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
6. Coordinate and pay for all flow tests required for design.
7. Provide complete flow calculations from point of known flow and pressure.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers: All sprinkler specialty material Grinnell /Gem, Central, Reliable,
Globe, Star, Viking, Automatic Sprinkler Corp. of America with UL or FM approval for use in
automatic sprinkler systems. All materials and equipment suitable for 175 psi working pressure.
1 E. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 15050.
F. Work of Other Trades: Comply with requirements of Section 15050.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Working Drawings:
1. Prepare fire protection system working drawing showing locations and types of head or
outlets, alarm valves and devices, pipe sizes and cutting lengths, test tees and valves,
drain valves, and other related items. Plans shall comply with the requirements of
Chapter 8, 1999 NFPA 13, irregardless of the edition adopted by the Governing Agencies
and used for design.
2. Provide 3 sets of drawings showing sprinkler head locations and layout coordinated with
architectural ceiling details to the Architect for review prior to submitting details to the
Governing Agencies.
3. Provide 6 sets of drawings to the Architect to be provided to Insurance Underwriter for
1 approval.
' 02054
MAR 05 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL PHASE 111 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15300 -1
Printed 3/2/2005
1
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
111
4. Provide 6 sets of drawings to designated representatives of the Fire Marshal for approval.
5. Then provide 6 sets of approved Drawings to the Architect for final review.
B. Submittals: I
1. Sprinkler Heads: Product Data for each type of head.
2. Alarm flow or pressure switches.
3. Fire department connection.
4. System control valves.
5. Piping materials.
6. Alarm bell.
7. Air Compressor and air maintenance device.
8. Miscellaneous Equipment.
C. Test Reports: Submit certificates of completion of tests and inspections.
1.04 EXTRA STOCK
A. Additional Heads: Provide number, type and temperature rating installed as required to meet
NFPA 13 requirements.
B. Storage Cabinet: Provide as required to receive reserve sprinkler heads and special installation
tools required.
C. Index Label: Provide for each head indicating manufacturer, model, orifice, size or K- factor, and
temperature rating. Also provide, inside cabinet, a list of heads stored within and brief description
of where installed. 1
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
4
A. Miscellaneous Sprinkler Specialties: Complete system including all items required by the
Governing Agency including but not limited to:
1. Electric alarm switch and indoor and outdoor alarm bell or water motor gong. I
2. Double check assembly.
3. Valve monitoring switches.
4. Fire department hose connections.
5. Wiring from the alarm switches to the point of connection in the Fire Alarm Control
Panel. Coordinate with the Electrical Work specified in Division 16.
B. Sprinkler Heads: Approved heads with temperature ratings required for service indicated. 1
1. Unfinished Areas: Upright, pendent or sidewall spray type, plain bronze. Provide with
head, guards.
2. Finished Areas: Chrome plated recessed and sidewall heads in finished ceilings and
where piping is exposed use chrome plated upright or sidewall extended coverage heads.
C. Escutcheons: Provide polished chrome escutcheons on pipe extending through finished walls and
ceilings.
D. Above Ground Water Piping: Use standard weight (schedule 40) black steel pipe ASTM A53,
A135, or A795, and cast iron screwed or mechanical joint fittings especially adapted and approved I
for sprinkler work. Use reducing fittings where changes in pipe size occur. Bushings are
prohibited.
E. At Contractor's option, Schedule 10 black steel pipe ASTM A135 or ASTM A795, and mechanical
joint fittings specifically approved for sprinkler use, may be substituted for the black steel pipe
specified above. Pipe shall be UL listed and FM approved for 300 psi working pressure. Pipe must
have a CRR of 1.00 or greater.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCI -TOOL DISTRICT 23J 15300 -2 III
Printed 3/2/2005
1
• SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
I
F. At contractor' option, thin wall threadable steel pipe, ASTM A135 or A795, and cast iron or
malleable iron screwed fittings 11/4" and smaller, approved for sprinkler work.
1 G. Valves: UL and/or FM listed for fire protection service.
1. Iron body OS &Y pattern, bronze mounted double disc, parallel seat. •
2. Iron body butterfly style with EPDM liner, bronze disc with lever or indicating type gear
operator.
3. Bronze body ball valve, three -piece design, with approved operator.
4. Where required by Governing Agency, provide wall or post•style indicating valves.
I H. Valve Monitoring Switches: Provide approved monitoring switches where shown on the Drawings
or required by Governing Agency.
I I. Guards: Standard manufacture.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
. 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Connect to water supply source as shown on Drawings, check adequacy and call any deficiency to
I attention of Architect. Coordinate with work in Section 15050.
B. Install all piping in a true and even manner with lines pitched for drainage and system arranged so
that it can be entirely emptied of water. Install hangers at all branch line connections to cross
mains and at all other points as required in herein before specified Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
and NFPA standards.
0111 . C. Support all pipe work from building construction with mild steel hangers spaced not more than 12
feet on centers. Support mains independently of branches and in no case shall branch hangers
assume any portion of the weight of mains.
D. Locate sprinkler heads in repeating, modular pattern, centered and accurately coordinated with
I ceiling grid as indicated. Conceal all piping unless indicated otherwise. Coordinate design with
lighting and exposed HVAC duct layout in areas without ceilings.
E. Locate and install the required fire sprinkler alarm, flow, and test and drain valves where required
I by the Governing Agency.
F. Where sprinkler lines penetrate fire rated partitions, provide fire stopping system in accordance
with Section 15050.
3.02 TEST
A. Test all pipes to a hydrostatic pressure of 200 psi and maintain for four hours minimum. Perform
other tests as directed by Governing Agency.
3.03 PAINT
1 A. Paint all exposed piping and hangers in accordance with Section 09900. Do not paint heads.
3.04 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION
I A. Obtain and deliver to Owner a certificate, in duplicate, stating that system as installed has been
inspected and accepted by authorities and /or agencies having jurisdiction, and that all regulations
affecting work have been satisfied. Submit an acceptable certificate to the Owner before final
payment is requested.
r B. Certificate: Minimum NFPA Form 8 -1 information per NFPA 13.
1
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 111 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15300 -3
Printed 3/2/2005
•
1
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
END OF SECTION 1
•
1
•
1
• 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
�1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III - CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15300 -4
Printed 3/2/2005
1
SECTION 15750
HEAT TRANSFER
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS •
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. The requirements of this section apply to the Heating and Air Conditioning systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 15050.
B. Submit catalog data, construction details and performance characteristics for each type and size of
heat transfer equipment.
C. Submit operating and maintenance data.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment Rating: Rated in accordance with ARI certified
rating procedures and bear the ARI label.
B. Gas -fired Equipment: Design certified by American Gas Association.
C. Codes: Comply with applicable sections of the State Mechanical Specialty Code.
D. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 15050 for field wiring.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DIRECT EXPANSION COOLING COIL:
' A. Non - ferrous extended surface, counterflow serpentine type with heavy gauge galvanized steel
casing with double sloped, non - ferrous drain pan suitable for duct mounting required. Assembled
with 5/8" OD x 0.020" thick copper tubes brazed to copper headers with one complete circuit
distributor for each capacity step of the compressor. Copper or aluminum fins mechanically
bonded to tube and spaced a maximum of 12 fins per inch. Construction shall allow for expansion
and contraction without developing leaks. Permanently label each coil in accessible location with
all operating parameters. Trane, Carrier, Heatcraft, Colmac, or approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install and arrange equipment as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the
equipment manufacturer.
B. Piping: Refer to applicable sections for piping, valves, insulation, painting, etc.
END OF SECTION
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15750 -1
Printed 3/2/2005
1
SECTION 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
1 A. Provide Air Distribution Equipment as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.
B. Equipment capacity and size shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
1 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Air Handling Equipment Rating: In accordance with AMCA certified rating procedures and
bearing the AMCA label.
I B. Ductwork: Comply with requirements of Chapter 6 of the Oregon State Mechanical Specialty
Code.
1 C. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 15050
PART2- PRODUCTS
I 2.01 SHEET METAL •
I A. Quality Assurance: Galvanized steel sheet metal except where otherwise indicated. Metal gauges,
joints and reinforcement in accordance with Mechanical Code, ASHRAE and SMACNA tables
and recommendations.
B. Acoustical Duct Lining: Line ducts with 1" thick, Schuller "Linacoustic," Gustin Bacon "Ultra -
Liner," or Owens Corning "Aeroflex" meeting NFPA 90A requirements for maximum flame
spread and smoke developed. Mechanically attach lining to sheet metal duct with Schuller Grip
Nails or Gramweld welding pins. Apply fire - retardant type adhesive similar to Schuller No. 44
adhesive, Benjamin Foster 81 -99, Insul - Coustic 22 or 3M equivalent on all leading edges, joints
1 and seams.
C. Duct Sealing Tapes: Provide one of the following UL listed ductwork sealing tape systems.
1. Aluminum bonded to aluminized mylar reinforced with fiberglass mesh backing an
I elastomeric pressure sensitive adhesive specifically formulated for adhesion to galvanized
metal. Hardcast AFG -1402 or accepted substitute.
2. Two -part sealing system with woven fiber, mineral gypsum impregnated tape and non-
flammable adhesive. Hardcast "DT" tape and "FTA -20" adhesive, United "Uni- Cast"
I 3. system, or accepted substitute.
For joints and seams exposed to the weather in lieu of soldering, United "Uni- Cast"
system or approved.
i D. Duct Joints for Sheet Metal Ducts: "Ductmate System" by Ductmate Industries, Inc., for making
transverse rectangular and round duct joints at contractor's option. Ward Duct Connectors, Inc.,
Lockformer TDC, Mez Industries, or acceptable substitute.
I E. Flexible Ductwork -Low Pressure: Insulated low pressure flexible duct, factory fabricated
assembly consisting of a zinc- coated spring steel helix seamless inner liner, wrapped with a
nominal 1" thick, 1 pound/cubic foot density fiberglass insulation. The assembly shall be sheathed
in a vapor barrier jacket, factory vapor resistance sealed at both ends of each section. The
I composite assembly, including insulation and vapor barrier, shall meet the Class 1 requirements of
NFPA Bulletin No. 90 -A and be labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., with a flame spread
rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or under. The duct shall have factory
sealed double air seal (interior and exterior) to assure an airtight installation. Genflex, ATCO,
I Wiremold, Thermaflex, Glassflex, Clevepak, Schuller, or accepted substitute.
1
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE [II — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15880 -1
Printed 3/2/2005
1
SECTION 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION
2.02 ACCESSORIES •
A. Manual Volume Dampers: Construct of material two gauges heavier than duct in which installed;
single plate up to 12" wide; multiple over 12" wide. Hem both edges 1/2" and flange sides 1/2 ".
Use Young, Duro -Dyne or accepted substitute damper accessories. Young numbers are shown.
1. No. 605 bearing set with No. 403 regulator for dampers up to 24" long.
2. For dampers over 24" long use No. 660 3/8" rod, No. 656 end bearing and No. 403
regulator.
3. Where damper regulators are not readily accessible, use No. 660 or No. 661 rod
extensions and No. 301 and No. 315 concealed damper regulators as required.
Location of all volume dampers is not necessarily shown on Drawings; minimum required is one in
each supply, return or exhaust main and one in each branch.
B. Locking Connection Straps: 1/2" wide positive locking steel straps or nylon self - locking straps.
Panduit or accepted substitute.
C. Access Doors In Sheet Metal Work:
1. Hollow core double construction of same or heavier gauge material as duct in which
installed. Use no door smaller than 12" by 12" for simple manual access or smaller than
18" by 24" where personnel must pass through infrequently. Use 24" by 60" minimum
for filters and more frequent maintenance. Use Ventlok or accepted substitute hinges and
latches on all doors.
a. 100 series hinges and latches on low pressure system doors up to 18" maximum
dimension.
b. 200 series on larger low pressure system doors and 333 series on high pressure
systems.
2. Construct doors up to 18" maximum dimension with 1" overlap, furrand gasket with 3/4"
by 1/8" sponge rubber. Fit larger doors against 1 -1/2" by 1/8" or angle frame and gasket
with 3/4" by 1/8" sponge rubber or felt.
D. Anti - Backdraft Dampers: Connected, felt -edged aluminum blades set in 14 gauge or heavier steel
frame; brass, nylon or Teflon bearings; equip with spring helper with tension adjustment feature or
with adjustable counterweight and adjust to open when not more than 0.10" wg pressure is applied.
Ruskin CBS -4, Pacific Air Products, Air Balance, Controlair or accepted substitute.
E. Flexible Connections: Neoprene impregnated fiberglass connection. Ventglass, Duro -Dyne, or
accepted substitute.
2.03 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
A. Description: Provide grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the Drawings. 1
B. Finishes:
1. Steel: Flat white enamel prime coat, factory applied on ceiling diffusers. Others are to
have a baked enamel finish, color as selected by Architect.
2. Aluminum: Anodized clear finish unless indicated otherwise.
C. Manufacturers: Carnes, Krueger, Titus, Price are accepted substitutes where only Titus model
numbers are listed. Where other manufacturer's products are listed and/or "accepted substitute" is
indicated, only the products or an accepted substitute for that item shall be provided.
D. Perforated Face Diffusers (Ceilings below 9'): Perforated snap -in or concealed hinged face plate
with internal deflection blades at diffuser neck in steel or extruded aluminum frame and margin to
suit the ceiling construction. Provide with opposed blade volume damper. Panel size shall be 24"
x 24" where lift-out tile ceiling system is indicated. Titus PCS.
E. Sidewall or Ceiling Return or Exhaust Register: Face bars parallel to long dimension on ceiling
type and horizontal on wall type; bars set at 35 degrees to 45 degrees, spaced on 0.66" to 0.75"
centers; key operated opposed blade volume damper. Titus 350RL series.
F. Sidewall Ceiling Supply Grille or Register: Double deflection grille with face bars parallel to long 1
dimension on ceiling type and horizontal on wall type; bars to be individually adjustable, spaced
on 0.66" to 0.75" centers; key operated opposed blade volume damper. Titus 300RL.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 111 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15880 -2
Printed 3/2/2005
1
SECTION 15880
I AIR DISTRIBUTION
F. Ceiling Matched Return and/or Exhaust Register: To match adjacent ceiling outlets. Use in
spaces containing ceiling diffusers and /or T -bar ceilings. Provide with damper except where
I dampered plenums are indicated. Match manufacturer of supply.
G. Louver Face Ceiling Diffusers (Ceilings above 9'): Rectangular type with pattern of distribution
as indicated. Provide with opposed blade volume dampers. Titus TMS.
I
•
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1 3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Air Handling Equipment Installation and Arrangement: Install and arrange as shown on Drawings.
Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for installation, connection, and start-up.
I B. Equipment Access Panels: Locate free of all obstructions such as ceiling bars, electrical conduit,
lights, ductwork, etc.
I 3.02 INSTALLATION OF GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
A. Size and air handling characteristics shall be as shown on the Drawings.
I B. Locate, arrange, and install grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the Drawings. Locate
registers in tee -bar ceilings with diffusers centered on the tile unless indicated otherwise.
3.03 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION
I A. Support: Install ductwork with 1" wide cradle hangers not more than 8' on centers or as required
by code. Support terminal units independent of adjacent ductwork. Attach to available building
construction according to good practices for materials involved.
0 B. Fan and Air Handling Unit Flexible Connections: Install neoprene impregnated fiberglass
connections in ductwork at all rotating equipment. Ventglass, Duro -Dyne or accepted substitute.
I C. Elbows and Fittings: Construct elbows with throat radius equal to duct width in plane of turn or
make them square and provide double wall, air foil turning vanes.
D. Fittings: Make transitions and take -offs as shown on Drawings. Provide volume dampers and
I E. splitter dampers as indicated on Drawings and as specified.
Acoustical Duct Lining: Acoustically line all outside air ducts and plenums, all fan unit intake and
discharge plenums, all ductwork indicated as lined on the Drawings, all sheet metal ductwork
I specified per Section 15250 as insulated, where exposed to view or subject to damage in areas
such as mechanical rooms, and, at the Contractor's option, all insulated ductwork specified in
Section 15250.
F. Manual Volume Dampers: Location of all volume dampers are not necessarily shown on the
I Drawings. Provide a minimum of one volume damper in each supply, return or exhaust branch.
Install dampers in fiberglass ductwork (where fiberglass ductwork is allowed) with galvanized
sheet metal sleeves of sheet metal gauges required for metal duct systems of the same dimensions.
I G. Duct Insulation: Insulate all ductwork specified in Section 15250 as requiring insulation. In
addition, all ductwork indicated in Table No. 53F of the Structural Specialty Code and Fire and
Life Safety Regulations shall be insulated or lined.
I H. Sleeves: Provide galvanized sheet metal plaster ring around ductwork penetrating exposed
finished walls.
I. Plenums: Construct sheet metal plenums and partitions of not lighter than 18 gauge galvanized
I steel and reinforce with 1 -1/2" by 1/2" by 1/8" angles as required to prevent drumming or
breathing.
1
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE I11 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15880 -3
Printed 3 /2/2005
1
SECTION 15880 •
AIR DISTRIBUTION
J. Access: Install necessary access opening and covers for cleaning, wiring or servicing motors,
filters, fans, both entering and leaving air sides of coils, fire and/or smoke dampers and to other
equipment located within or blocked by sheet metal work.
K. Sealing: Caulk, seal, grout and/or tape ductwork and plenums to make airtight at seams, joints,
edges, corners and at penetrations. Solder all seams, joints, etc., on all ductwork exposed to the
weather. Install specified tape in accordance with manufacturer's requirements using degreaser on
surfaces to be taped and wiped to eliminate moisture.
L. Flexible Duct Connections:
1. Install in full extended condition, free of sags and kinks, using only the minimum length
required to make the connection.
2. Make all joints and connections with 1/2" wide positive locking steel straps or nylon self -
locking straps and make connections to non - metallic ducts with sheet metal sleeves or
manufactured sheet metal "spin -in" fittings.
3. Thoroughly coat all high pressure duct interior with an approved high pressure duct sealer
to overlap 3" and secure in place over sheet metal collar with 1/2" wide positive locking
strap. On vertically suspended ducts, secure with a minimum of three sheet metal screws
on a maximum of 8" on center.
3.04 NEW DUCTWORK CLEANING
A. Store all ductwork materials on pallets or above grade, protected from weather, dirt/mud and other
construction dust.
B. Remove all accumulated dust, dirt, etc. from each duct section as it is being installed.
C. Prior to installation of diffusers, grilles and registers, install temporary system filters and cover all
diffuser, grille and register openings with temporary 25% efficiency filter materials and start the
fan systems. Operate fans a minimum of 8 hours. Remove all temporary filters at the end of that
period.
D. Clean all diffusers, grilles and registers just prior to project final completion.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15880 -4
Printed 3 /3/2005
1 •
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
1
I PART 1 . GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
I A. Work Included: After completion of the work of installation, test and regulate all components of
the new heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems to verify air volumes and heating- cooling
flow rates indicated on the Drawings.
I B. Balancing Organization:
1. Balancing of the Heating and Air Conditioning Systems: Performed by a firm providing
this service established in the State of Oregon.
2. Balancing Organization: Approval by Architect. Air Balancing Specialties, Neudorfer
I Engineers, Northwest Engineering Services, Accurate Balancing Inc., Pacific Cost Air
Balancing or approved.
3. Provide all necessary personnel, equipment, and services.
I 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Balancing of the Heating and Air Conditioning Systems: Agency shall be a current member of
NEBB or AABC specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified with a minimum
I of 10 years documented experience.
B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be performed under direct field supervision of a Certified .
NEBB Supervisor or a Certified AABC Supervisor.
I 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300, Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of
Contract.
C. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and
1 balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
1. Submit under provisions of Section 15050.
2. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting,
I balancing, and equipment data required. .
3. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final
• copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
4. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3 -ring binder manuals, complete with index page
I and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced
drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and
indicating thermostat locations.
5. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms, and copy of AABC National
I • Project Performance Guaranty or other certifying agency prior to commencing system
balance.
6. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN -1 forms, forms prepared following ASHRAE
111, NEBB forms, or forms containing information indicated in Schedules.
I 7. Include the following on the title page of each report:
a. Name of testing, adjusting, and balancing agency.
b. Address of testing, adjusting, and balancing agency.
c. Telephone number of testing, adjusting, and balancing agency.
d. Project name.
e. Project location.
f. Project Architect and Owner.
g. Project Engineer.
'' h. Project Contractor.
i. Project altitude.
j. Report date.
1
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD— TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23.1 15990 -1
Printed 3/2/2005
•
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and balancing
valves and rough setting.
E. Provide a list of equipment, air supply, return and exhaust, heating water, and chilled water I
systems not in compliance with tolerances subsequently specified.
PART2- PRODUCTS 111
NOT USED
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
• 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following
conditions: 1
1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to
final filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
6. Fans are rotating correctly.
I
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage is minimized.
12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.
4
13. Pumps are rotating correctly.
14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.
I
15. Service and balance valves are open.
B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which
prevent system balance.
C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES I
A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent of design for supply
systems and +/- 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent of design to space.
Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within +/- 10 percent of design.
C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within +/- 10 percent of design. I
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. 1
B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to
be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such
disruption has been rectified.
D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors
1 to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS I
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15990 -2
Printed 3/2/2005
1
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
III
E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas
I as selected and witnessed by the Owner.
3.04 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
I A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and
exhaust air quantities.
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of
duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
' D. Adjust noise distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable
drafts and noise.
E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to the extent that adjustments do not
I create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices
such as dampers and splitters.
F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required.
I Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.
I H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops,
and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design
Ill conditions.
J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check
leakage.
I K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions.
Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow
rate, full heating.
I L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide
required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05" (12.5 Pa) positive static
pressure near the building entries.
I M. For variable air volume system powered units, set volume controller to air flow setting indicated.
Confirm connections are properly made and confirm proper operating for automatic variable air
volume temperature control. Adjust drives to maximum airflow for highest static condition.
Allow VFD to regulate airflow per specification.
I 3.05 SCHEDULES
A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing:
I 1. Air handling units
2. Air filters
3. Air inlets and outlets
1 B. Report:
1. Summary Comments:
I a.
b. Design versus final performance
Notable characteristics of system
c. Description of systems operation sequence
d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building
I e. pressurization
Nomenclature used throughout report
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PI -LASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15990 -3
Printed 3/2/2005
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
f. Test conditions
2. Instrument List:
a. Instrument
b. Manufacturer
c. Model number
d. Serial number
e. Range
f. Calibration date
C. Electric Motors:
1. Manufacturer
I
2. Model/frame
3. HP/BHP
4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
5. RPM
6. Service factor
7. Starter size, rating, heater elements
8. Sheave make /size /model
I
D. V -Belt Drives:
1. Identification/location
2. Required driven RPM
3. Driven sheave, diameter, and RPM
4. Belt, size, and quantity
5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM
6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and tested
E. Refrigerant Cooling Coils:
1. Identification/number .4
2. Location
3. Service
4. Manufacturer
5. Air flow, design and actual
6. Entering air DB temperature, design and tested
7. Entering air WB temperature, design and tested
8. Leaving air DB temperature, design and tested
9. Leaving air WB temperature, design and tested
10. Air pressure drop, design and tested
III
11. Saturated suction temperature, design and tested
F. Heating Coils: 111 1. Identification/number
2. Location
3. Service
4. Manufacturer
5. Air flow, design and tested
6. Water flow, design and tested
7. Water pressure drop, design and tested i
8. Entering water temperature, design and tested
9. Leaving water temperature, design and tested
10. Entering air temperature, design and tested
11. Leaving air temperature, design and tested
I
12. Air pressure drop, design and tested
G. Air Moving Equipment:
1. Location r
2. Manufacturer
3. Model number
4. Serial number
5. Anrangement/C1ass /Discharge
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PI -IASE III - CE2 /TRANSITIONS
1
MAR 05 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15990 -4
Printed 3 /2/2005
1
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
I 6. Air flow, specified and tested
7. Return air flow, specified and tested
I 8. Outside air flow, specified and tested
9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and tested
10. Inlet pressure
11. Discharge pressure
I 12. Sheave make /size/bore
13. Number of Belts/Make /Size
14. Fan RPM
I H. Return Air /Outside Air:
1. Identification/location
2. Supply air flow, design and tested
I 3. Return air flow, design and tested
4. Outside air flow, design and tested
5. Return air temperature
6. Outside air temperature
I 7. Mixed air temperature, design and tested
1. Duct Traverses:
I 1. System zone/branch
2. Duct size
3. Area
4. Design velocity •
5. Design air flow
I 6. Test velocity
7. Test air flow
8. Duct static pressure
Pi 9. Air temperature
10. Air correction factor
J. Air Distribution Tests:
I 1.
2. Air terminal number
Room number /location
3. Terminal type
4. Terminal size
I 5. Area factor
6. Design velocity
7. Design air flow
8. Test (final) velocity
I 9. Test (final) air flow
10. . Percent of design air. flow
3.06 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS
1 A. Adjusting and Balancing:
1. Adjust and balance all portions of the mechanical systems to produce indicated results
I 2. within limits of minus 5 or plus 10 percent or as subsequently directed by the Architect.
Balancing data may be spot checked with instruments similar to that used by the
balancing firm.
3. If, in the judgment of the Architect, the discrepancies warrant additional adjustment,
I readjust and rebalance the systems at no additional project cost.
END OF SECTION
1
I 02054
MAR 05 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 1II - CE2 /TRANSITIONS
TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15990 -5
Printed 3/2/2005 "
1
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
B. The provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply
1 to the electrical work specified in this Section.
C. The requirements of this Section apply to the electrical systems specified in these Specifications
and in other Division 16 sections.
I D. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned,
shown and/or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, including all labor,
supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete
I and operable facility with complete systems as shown, specified, and required by applicable codes.
E. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following systems:
1. Complete lighting and power systems, including branch circuits, devices, lighting fixtures,
I
etc.
2. Extension of existing fire alarm system.
• 3. Connection of electrical equipment furnished under other Divisions of this Specification.
4. Wiring to and connection of electrical equipment or appliances furnished outside of these
I Specifications and Contract but described on the Electrical Drawings.
5. Special systems as specified herein.
6. Grounding
7. Rough -in provisions for data, telephone, and CATV systems.
Pi P. Advise subcontractor, suppliers, and vendors involved in the work specified in this Section of the
applicable requirements.
I G. Temporary electrical service, Division 1.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable local and state codes and all federal, state
I and other applicable laws and regulations. All clarifications and modifications which have been
cleared with appropriate authorities are listed under the applicable sections. All electrical products
shall bear the UL label.
I B. Whenever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the applicable code
or standard, the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings shall govern.
C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the current provisions of the following referenced codes,
I standards and specifications:
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
2. Federal Specifications (FS)
3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
I 4. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
7. Factory Mutual (FM)
I 8. Uniform Building Code (UBC) with State and Local Amendments
9. National Electrical Code (NEC) with State and Local Amendments
10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
11. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
I
12. Uniform Fire Code (UFC) with State and Local Amendments
13. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16050 -1
Printed 03/03/05
1
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS '
D. Each piece of equipment furnished shall meet all detailed requirements of the Drawings and
Specifications and shall be suitable for the installation shown. Equipment not meeting all
requirements will not be acceptable, even though specified by name. Where two or more units of
I
the same class of equipment are furnished, use product of the same manufacturer; component parts
of the entire system need not be products of same manufacturer. Furnish all materials and
equipment, new and free from defect and of size, make, type and quality herein specified or
approved by the Architect. All materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner.
I
E. All apparatus shall be built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which
it was designed.
F. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary. What is called for by one shall be as though
I
called for by both.
1.03 WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTS
A. Work under this contract shall be conducted in a manner to allow for the future installations of
such equipment or items, and include the wiring and/or devices shown on the Drawings or listed in
other sections of this Specification. Also see "Equipment Connections." I
1.04 WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS
A. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with the installation of such
equipment or items as specified in other Divisions.
1
B. Control devices and control wiring relating to the heating and air conditioning systems are
specified under other Sections of these Specifications except for provisions or items specifically
noted on the Drawings or specified herein.
C. Consult all Drawings and Specifications in this project and become familiar with all equipment to
be installed. Coordinate all aspects of the construction with the other trades on the job to ensure
that all work and materials required to provide a complete and operational facility are included in
the bid.
III
D. All sections of Division 16 are interrelated and shall be considered in their entirety when
interpreting any material, method, or direction listed in any section of Division 16. Individual
Il
sections are not written for specific subcontractors or suppliers but for the general contractor.
1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 full technical and descriptive shop drawing data on proposed
1
materials and equipment as detailed in each section.
B. The Contractor shall verify that all equipment submitted can be delivered and installed within the ,
time constraints of the construction period.
C. Include the manufacturer, type, style, catalog number, complete specification, certified dimensions,
and description of physical appearance for each item and option submitted. Reproduction of
catalog data sheets shall be clean and legible to show all details, including gauge of metal used.
D. Include only information on exact equipment to be installed, not general catalogs of the
manufacturer. Where sheets show proposed equipment as well as other equipment, identify
proposed equipment with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method.
E. Submit with each copy a transmittal letter verifying that all included equipment submittals have
been carefully considered for quality, dimensions, function, and have been coordinated with the '
Drawings and Specifications. Guarantee that proposed materials will meet or exceed the quality
and function of those specified.
F. Include wire run and connection diagrams for all signal and/or low voltage systems, including floor
1
plans.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16050 -2
Printed 03/03/05
1
SECTION 16050
I BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
G. Submittal Review: The submittal review process is a means to determine quality control. The
action noted to be taken (or where conflicts with the contract documents are not noted) shall not be
I interpreted by the Contractor as automatic "change orders." Approval of the data for substitution
and shop drawings shall not eliminate the contractor's responsibility for compliance with Drawings
or Specifications, nor shall it eliminate the responsibility for freedom from errors of any sort in the
data discovered prior to or after the review process. Deviations, discrepancies, and conflicts
I between the submittals and the Contract Documents shall be called to the Architect's attention in
writing at the time of transmittal of the data.
H. Unless otherwise directed by Division 1, submittal data shall be in a 3 -ring plastic binder with a
1 clear plastic sleeve and a project identification sheet inserted. Arrange submittals numerically with
specification sections identified on divider tabs. All required sections shall be submitted at one
time.
I 1.06 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION
A. Unless otherwise note, material other than those specified may be approved for this project
providing a written request is submitted to the Architect prior to bid in accordance with
I Instructions to Bidders. Requests shall include complete specifications, dimensions, manufacturer
and catalog number for each item for which approval is desired. If, in the opinion of the Architect,
the material is not complete or if it is not an acceptable substitute, he may reject it. The Architect's
evaluation will be based solely on the material submitted.
1.07 CHANGE ORDERS
A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied by a complete itemized
I breakdown of labor and materials without exception. At the Architect's request, the contractor's
estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be made available to the Architect.
Labor must be separated and allocated for each item of work.
pi 1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain a set of record drawings as directed in Division 1.
B. Keep Drawings clean, undamaged, and up to date.
I C. Record and accurately indicate the following:
1. Depths, sizes, and locations of all buried and concealed conduits /cables.
2. Changes, additions, and revisions due to change orders, addenda, obstructions, etc.
I Eradicate extraneous information.
D. Make Drawings available when requested by Architect for review.
1 E. Submit as part of the required Project Closeout documents as indicated in Division 1.
F. Use standards set in contract documents. Note field modifications, all addenda and change order
items on project record drawings. if deficiencies are found in either the quality or the accuracy of
I the drawings, they will be returned unapproved. Additional review of subsequent submissions
shall be at the contractor's expense.
1.09 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1 A. Upon completion of Contract and after no further action is noted as being required on catalog data
submitted for review, submit multiple sets of Operating and Maintenance Manuals for inclusion in
Owner's Maintenance Brochure as specified in Division 1. Operation and maintenance manuals
I shall include descriptive and technical data, maintenance and operation procedures, wiring
diagrams, spare parts lists, service representatives, supplier for replacement parts, etc. Bind each
set of Operating and Maintenance Manuals in 3 -ring, vinyl or canvas covered, loose leaf binders
organized with index and thumb -tab marker for each classification of equipment or data.
1
1
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE I[I — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16050 -3
Printed 03/03/05
•
1
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
111
1.10 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. At the completion of the project, at a time scheduled by the Owner, assemble key mechanics,
subcontractors, vendors, factory representatives and similar personnel required to explain all facets
of maintenance and operation of the installed system to the Owner's personnel. Instructions shall
include actual operation of systems and methods of maintenance.
1.11 ALTERNATE BIDS 1
A. Refer to Division 1 for possible effect upon Work of this Division.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Furnish, prior to application for final payment, three copies of written and signed guarantee
effective a period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of entire project; agree to
correct, repair and/or replace defective materials and/or equipment or the results of defective
workmanship without additional expense to the Owner. Where no response satisfactory to the
Owner has occurred within three working days from the written report of a warranty covered
defect, the contractor shall agree to pay for the cost of repair of the reported defect by a contractor
of the Owner's choice.
B. Where the manufacturer's guarantee exceeds one year, the longer guarantee shall govern and
include the Contractor's labor.
•
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS 1
A. All electrical products installed in this project shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or
be approved in writing by the local inspection authority as required by governing codes and
ordinances.
B. All material shall be new and bear manufacturer's name, model number, electrical characteristics
and other identification, and shall be the standard product of manufacturer regularly engaged m
production of similar material.
C. All materials shall be of manufacturer's latest design, and of the best quality. The materials shall
be manufactured in accordance with applicable standards listed under Quality Assurance.
2.02 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide panels of adequate size for equipment requiring service and installed above plaster or
gypsum board ceilings, behind walls or in furring. Furnish complete with correct frame for type of
building construction involved. Size, number and location of access panels is not necessarily
shown on Drawings. Use no panel smaller than 12" x 12" for simple manual access, nor smaller
than 16" x 20" where personnel must pass through. Milcor Style A, K, L, or M panels or
equivalent Bilco or Potter - Roemer as required by construction. Access panels shall maintain
ceiling fire rating.
2.03 PAINTING
A. The work of this Division includes painting of the electrical items. All exposed conduits, boxes, 1
surface raceways, etc. shall be painted per the Architect's direction. See Division 9 for additional
painting requirements.
2.04 FIRE RATINGS 1
A. Electrical items (light fixtures, boxes, etc.) recessed into fire rated walls or ceilings shall be
alcoved in gypboard enclosures or be UL listed to maintain the fire rating.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE II1 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16050 -4
Printed 03/03/05
.1 .
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
I PART 3 - EXECUTION
I 3.01 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall inspect the job site prior to bidding and become familiar with existing ,
conditions which will affect his work. The Drawings are diagrammatic indicating approximate
I . location of outlets, lighting fixtures, electrical equipment, etc. Consult the Architectural, Structural
and Mechanical Drawings to avoid conflicts with equipment, structural members, etc. When
required, make all deviations from Drawings to make the work conform to the building as
constructed, and to related work of others. Minor relocations ordered prior to installation may be
made without added cost to the Owner.
I B. Obvious omissions from Drawings or Specifications or differences between Drawings and
Specifications shall be called to the Architect's attention at least ten (10) days prior to the bid date
I for clarification. Failure to do so will be construed as the willingness of this Contractor to supply
all necessary materials and labor required for the proper completion of this work in a manner
approved by the Architect.
I C. Call to the attention of the Architect any error, conflict or discrepancy in Drawings and/or
Specifications. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has
been made.
D. Supplementary details and plans may be supplied as required and they will become a part of the
Contract Documents.
E. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with all other trades for
I proper installation of all items of equipment.
F. Coordination of work with other crafts employed on the project is mandatory. Arrange work to
reduce interruption of existing services to minimum. When interruptions are unavoidable, consult
Pi Architect and utilities involved and agree in writing, with copy to the Architect, upon a mutually
satisfactory time and duration.
G. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available space and
promptly notify the Architect prior to roughing -in if conflicts appear. Coordination of equipment
I to fit the available space and the access routes through the construction shall be the Contractor's
liability.
H. Locations of items shown on the Drawings as existing are partially based on record and other
I drawings which may contain errors. The Contractor shall verify the correctness of the information
shown prior to bidding and provide such labor and material as is necessary to accomplish the intent
of the Drawings.
I I. Install equipment such that code - required working clearances are maintained, and allow clearances
for future maintenance.
3.02 PROTECTION OF WORK
1 A. Protect electrical work, wire and cable, materials and equipment installed under this Division
against damage by other trades, weather conditions or any other causes. Equipment found •
damaged or in other than new condition will be rejected as defective.
I B. Switchgear, panels, light fixtures and electrical equipment shall be kept covered or closed to
exclude moisture, dust, dirt, plaster, cement, or paint and shall be free of all contamination before
acceptance. Enclosures and trims shall be in new condition, free of rust, scratches or other finish
I defects. Properly refinish in a manner acceptable to the Architect if damaged.
C. Including products of other Sections, clean, repair and touch -up or replace when directed, products
which have been soiled, discolored or damaged.
1 D. Provide for dehumidification of equipment during construction when directed by Architect.
E. Remove debris from project site upon completion or sooner if directed.
1
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16050 -5
Printed 03/03/05 .
1
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
I
3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION METHODS
A. Provide raceways and conduits for all electrical system wiring as specified herein. Class II or III
systems wiring installed per Article 725 of NEC will be required to be installed in raceway unless
I
otherwise indicated. When open wiring is permitted, raceways will be required in insulated walls
and in other inaccessible areas. Low voltage wiring installed in return air plenums shall utilize
plenum rated cable. I
B. The extent of the branch circuiting and control wiring shown shall not be changed.
C. Cross or hash marks on power and lighting conduit runs indicate quantity of No. 12 minimum I
copper branch circuit conductors unless otherwise noted. Where such marks do not appear,
provide conductors as required to provide an operable system, sized per local codes.
D. Repair surfaces damaged during installation to match adjacent undisturbed areas. Surface
I
preparation, including cleaning and priming, shall be in accordance with the paint manufacturer's
requirements.
E. In general, the mounting heights shall be as noted on the Drawings or as listed below. Where no
heights are indicated, request clarification from the Architect. Consult the Architectural,
Structural, and Mechanical Drawings to avoid conflicts prior to roughing in. All dimensions are to
the center of the device above finished floor unless specified otherwise. Lighting dimensions are
to the bottom of suspended fixtures; mount panelboards 72" to top handle; mount devices above
counters, 12" above counter or 4 -1/2" above backsplash, whichever is greater; and receptacles in
unfinished areas 48 ".
F. All raceways and wiring shall be concealed where possible. All wiring devices, recessed light
fixtures, etc., shall be flush mounted unless otherwise noted.
I
G. Relays, panels, cabinets and equipment shall be level and plumb and installed parallel with
structural building lines. All equipment and enclosures shall be suitable for the environmental
conditions in which they will operate.
III
H. The Drawings do not indicate all items necessary. Provide associated equipment, materials, and
labor as required for complete and operable systems.
3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1
A. Under no conditions are beams, girders, footings or columns to be cut for electrical items unless so
shown on Drawings or written approval obtained from the Architect.
I
B. Cutting, patching and repairing for the proper installation and completion of the work specified,
including plastering, gypsum board, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work and painting
shall be performed by workers skilled in their respective trades.
I
C. Follow requirements specified in Division 1.
3.05 SLEEVES AND CHASES I
A. Provide necessary rigid conduit sleeves, openings and chases where conduits or cables are required
to pass through floors, ceilings or walls. Seal all openings around conduits against leaks and in a
manner to maintain the fire rating of the structure penetrated. Prevent unnecessary cutting in I
connection with the finished work. Make all repairs and seals in a manner acceptable to the
Architect.
3.06 NOISE CONTROL I
A. The entire electrical system apparatus shall operate at full capacity without objectionable noise or
vibration.
B. Outlet boxes at opposite sides of partitions shall not be placed back -to -back, nor shall straight-'
through boxes be employed, except where specifically permitted on the Drawings by note, to
minimize transmission of noise between occupied spaces.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE Ill — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16050 -6
I
Printed 03/03/05
1
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
I C. Contactors, transformers, starters, and similar noise - producing devices shall not be placed on walls
which are common to occupied spaces unless specifically called for on the Drawings. Where such
devices must be mounted on walls common to occupied spaces, they shall be shock mounted or
isolated in such a manner as to effectively prevent the transmission of their inherent noise to the
occupied space.
I D. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers, and like equipment which are found to be noticeably
noisier than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective and shall be replaced.
3.07 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
1 A. Provide complete electrical connections for all items of equipment requiring such connections,
including incidental wiring, materials, devices and labor necessary for a finished working
installation.
I B. Verify the rough -in and wiring requirements for all equipment provided under other Divisions of
the work and requiring electrical connections with equipment supplier and installer prior to rough -
in. Check the voltage and phase of each item of equipment before connecting. Motor connections
I shall be made for the proper direction of rotation. Pump motors shall not be test run until liquid is
in the system and proper lubrication to all bearings in unit is checked. Minimum size flex for
mechanical equipment shall be 1/2 ". Exposed motor wiring shall be jacketed metallic flex.
C. Conduit, wire and circuit breaker sizes for mechanical equipment and equipment furnished under
I other Divisions are based on the equipment ratings of one manufacturer. The equipment actually
furnished may be of a different brand with different electrical characteristics. Conduit, wire and
circuit breakers shall not be ordered or installed until exact electrical requirements are obtained.
Responsibility for this coordination shall rest with the Contractor.
I 3.08 TESTS
Oil A. Complete each system as shown or specified herein and place in operation except where only
roughing -in or partial systems are called for. Each system shall be tested and left in proper
operation free of faults, shorts, or unintentional grounds.
B. After the interior wiring system installation is completed, and at such time as the Owner may
direct, the Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval. The equipment shall be
I
demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. The test shall be
performed in the presence of the Owner or an authorized representative. The Contractor shall
furnish all instruments and personnel required for the tests, and the Owner will furnish the
I necessary electric power. The Contractor shall submit in writing to the Owner upon completion of
the project the measured ground resistance of each ground rod, indicating the location of the rod,
the resistance, and the soil conditions at the time the measurements were made.
I 3.09 DEMOLITION AND REMODELING NOTES
A. Keep all systems functioning with minimum system interruptions. Power, telephone, and life -
safety system interruptions shall be coordinated with the Owner.
I B. The Contractor shall have the option to reuse existing raceways as far as practical, provided it
remains code accessible, concealed by new work, and not in conflict with demolition.
I C. The Electrical Drawings are not wiring diagrams but schematic plans prepared to aid the
Contractor in bidding the electrical revisions and additions shown. It is intended that the
Contractor shall visit the job site prior to bidding to verify all existing conditions which will be
affected by or will have affect upon the required revisions and additions, prepare a wiring diagram,
I secure all permits and accomplish the work, securing approval from the Architect for deviations
from the schematic plan.
D. Remove all unused lighting fixtures from remodel area prior to completion of the work.
I E. All removed lighting fixtures and other electrical devices accumulated during the demolition
process not scheduled to be reused or turned over to the Owner shall become the property of the
Contractor and shall be removed from site prior to completion of work.
1
I 02054
MAR 05 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITI.ONS
TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16050 -7
Printed 03/03/05
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
F. Remove all existing fixtures, clocks, horns, switches, receptacles, and other wiring devices from
surfaces scheduled for remodeling. Replace devices as required following application of
remodeling finishes, installing box extensions where required.
G. If abandoned outlets serve as feed - through boxes for other existing electrical equipment which is
being retained, new conduit and wire shall be provided to bypass the abandoned outlets. If
existing conduits pass through partitions which are being removed or remodeled, new conduit and
wire shall be provided to route around the wall and maintain service to the existing load.
H. Where devices are removed from a wall to remain, provide blank cover plate similar to other cover
plates in that area. Connect each new device or item of equipment to existing or new branch
circuit wiring. It is the general intent that new devices shall be connected, reusing existing circuits
wherever possible.
The contractor shall trace the remaining Load on existing branch circuits, remove all unused wiring,
make code approved circuit consolidations (where possible) to conserve and update use of existing
capacity, and provide new updated panel schedules. Provide copies of resulting panel schedules
and transmit with the electrical record drawing set, on which the contractor shall also note "as-
built" circuit number assignments.
J. Where existing electrical items are scheduled for removal, also remove associated raceways,
boxes, conduits, etc. as far as practical.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16050 -8
Printed 03/03/05
1 .
SECTION 16110
CONDUITS, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
1 PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
B. Provide all raceways and fittings of specified type required for complete project. Install all
1 systems in raceways unless specifically noted otherwise.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed and NEC approved.
1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I A. Deliver raceways with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label and bearing manufacturer's name on
each length.
B. Deliver fittings in manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages with labels legible
I and intact.
1.04 APPLICATION
I A. Areas of use:
Underground PVC
Pi Within poured Concrete (except GRC, IMC, PVC
slab -on grade)
Dry concealed locations GRC, IMC, EMT
Dry exposed locations, subject to GRC, IMC
damage
I Dry exposed locations, not subject GRC, IMC, EMT
to damage
Hazardous Class I or II GRC, IMC
I B. Underground conduit shall be minimum 3/4" trade size. PVC shall not be used inside building.
Unless otherwise approved, all conduits shall be installed under reinforcing steel..
I C. Where the contractor elects to utilize PVC in lieu of GRC, the contractor shall provide
supplemental ground bus in terminating switch and panelboards, and green ground wire in conduit
according to code rules.
I D. For the purposes of this section, poured concrete slabs on grade and under - the - building slabs are
not classified as dry locations.
I E. Flexible metal conduit will be permitted only where flexibility is necessary. Exceptions are
connections to recessed light fixtures. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for connection to all
equipment subject to movement or vibration such as motors, transformers, etc. Liquid -tight
flexible metal conduit shall be used when moisture may be present and for exposed motor and
U equipment connections.
F. Surface raceway may be used only where specifically called for on the Drawings or in the
Specifications.
1 G. Aluminum conduit is not permitted. .
1.05 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. Submit product data for surface raceway and wireway.
I 02054 TIGARD HIGF1 SCHOOL ADDITION/ REMODEL - PHASE [II — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16110-1
Printed 03/03/05
•
1
SECTION 16110
CONDUITS, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
1
PART 2- PRODUCTS .
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
I
A. Allied Tube & Conduit, Western Tube & Conduit, Triangle, Carlon, Western Plastics, Alflex, or
approved substitute. Wiremold, Walker, or approved substitute.
2.02 CONDUITS 1
A. Galvanized Rigid Conduit (GRC) shall be hot -dip zinc, galvanized inside and out, mild steel pipe
manufactured in accordance with UL -6 and ANSI C80.1. All threads shall be galvanized after
I
cutting.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be steel only and shall comply with UL -797 and ANSI
C80.3. Exterior shall be hot -dip zinc galvanized and interior protected by a corrosion- resistant
I
lubricating coating.
C. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) shall comply with UL -1242 and ANSI C80.6. Exterior shall
be hot -dip zinc galvanized and interior protected by a corrosion- resistant lubricating coating.
I
D. Rigid non - metallic conduit (PVC) polyvinyl chloride, schedule 40, shall comply with UL -651 and
NEMA TC 2.
E. Surface raceway shall utilize snap -in cover and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer and
I
shall comply with UL 5 standard.
F. Flexible metal conduit shall be steel and comply with UL 1 and ANSI standards. Liquid -tight
I
flexible metal conduit shall comply with UL 360 and ANSI standards.
2.03 WIREWAYS
A. Gutters: Steel, painted, square in cross section, preformed knockouts on standard spacing, screw
cover, suitable for environment. 4
B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold -
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for a
complete system.
2.04 FITTINGS
A. GRC and IMC shall be coupled and terminated with threaded fittings. Ends shall be bushed with 1
insulating bushings equal to T &B 1220 or 1230 series.
B. Connectors and couplings for EMT shall be steel concrete tight compression type or set screw type
I
with insulated throats on connectors. Indent type connectors shall not be used.
C. Conduits piercing a building waterproof membrane shall be provided with O -Z type FSR fittings.
D. Flexible metal conduit shall utilize screw -in type connectors. Couplings and set -screw type I
• connectors are not permitted.
E. Seal -offs with filler fiber, compound, large removable cover. All components shall be of the same
manufacturer.
F. Expansion Couplings:
1. Exposed Conduit Runs: Expansion couplings shall be weatherproof with external
I
bonding jumper, providing at least 4" longitudinal movement with bushed conduit ends.
2. Concealed Conduit Runs: Expansion couplings shall be water tight with an internal
bonding jumper and neoprene construction. The fitting shall allow 3/4" movement in any
I
direction or deflection of 30 degrees from normal.
G. Locknuts shall be galvanized steel.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS I
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16110-2
Printed 03/03/05
SECTION 16110
I' CONDUITS, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Ends of metal conduits shall be reamed and left free of burrs. .
I B. Provide pull boxes or vaults where shown or required to limit the number of bends in any conduit
to not more than three 90 degree bends, or to ease pulling tension. Use boxes of code- required
' size with removable covers, installed so that covers will be accessible after work is completed.
C. Conceal all wiring in finished spaces so far as practicable. Exposed conduit shall be used only in
I unfinished spaces.
D. - Exposed raceways shall be parallel or at right angles to structural lines, and shall be neatly offset
I into boxes.
E. Conduit stubbed from a concrete slab or wall to serve an outlet mounted on a table or to supply a
machine shall have a rigid conduit coupling flush with the surface of the slab. Provide plug where
I conduit is to be used in future. .
F. Keep conduit and raceway closed with suitable plugs or caps during construction to prevent
entrance of dirt, moisture, concrete or foreign objects. Raceways shall be clean and dry before
I installation of wire and at the time of acceptance.
G. Remove all foreign matter from raceways and pull mandrel through conduits larger than 1 -1/2"
prior to installing conductors.
I H. Where no conduit size is noted on the Drawings, conduit may be the minimum code permitted size
for the quantity of type THHN conductors installed, but in no case smaller than 1/2" trade
diameter. Conductor quantities indicated in conduits do not include ground wire unless otherwise
PI noted. Adjust conduit sizes accordingly.
1. Where the contractor elects to combine branch circuit runs shown as separate runs on the
Drawings, provide a minimum 3/4" conduit or increase raceway size to provide a minimum of 25
I J.
percent spare capacity for future conductors. Feeder runs shall not be combined.
All conduits installed in concrete construction, underground, or under the building slab shall be
minimum 3/4 ", unless otherwise noted.
1 K. Assemble, glue and seal PVC conduit in straight lengths prior to installation in trench.
L. Seal -offs shall be installed in all conduits which route from warm areas into refrigerated areas.
I M. Install PVC conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Cut the conduit ends square
and apply an approved solvent to clean the joint. Apply an approved cement and allow to set 24
hours before installing conductors.
I N. Conduits shall be fastened to all sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required
by the National Electrical Code, where insulating bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be
brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, a single locknut and bushing may be used.
I O. A pull wire shall be inserted into each empty raceway in which wiring is to be installed by others.
The pull wire shall be of No. 15 AWG zinc- coated steel, or of plastic having not less than 200 -
pound tensile strength. Not less than 10" of slack shall be left at each end of the pull wire.
I P. Raceway shall not be installed under the fire pits of boilers and furnaces and shall be kept 6" away
from parallel runs of flues, steam pipes and hot water pipes.
Q. Changes in direction of runs shall be made with symmetrical bends or cast -metal fittings. Field-
I made bends and offsets shall be made with an approved hickey or conduit - bending machine.
Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be installed.
R. Expansion fittings complete with grounding jumpers shall be installed where raceways cross
1 expansion joints, construction joints, sawed joints, and where shown.
02054 • TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 111 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16110 -3
Printed 03/03/05
SECTION 16110
CONDUITS, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
1
S. Where conduit is shown stubbed into a telephone, computer or communication terminal area,
conduit shall be stubbed up 6" above floor or 12" below ceiling and terminated with insulating
bushings.
T. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements to ensure
adequate head room, working clearance, and access to both boxes and other equipment.
U. The end of a conduit stub shall have an insulated bushing.
V. Pack spaces around conduits with polyethylene backing rods and seal with polyurethane caulking
to prevent entrance of moisture where conduits are installed in sleeves or block -outs penetrating
partitions.
W. Install intumescent material around ducts, conduits, etc., to prevent spread of smoke or fire where
installed in sleeves or block -outs penetrating fire -rated barriers. An alternate method utilizing
intumescent materials in caulk and/or putty form may be used.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16110 -4
Printed 03/03/05
1
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS
1 PART 1-
1.01 DESCRIPTION
' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
B. Provide all conductors, cables, connectors, lugs, cable ties, and terminations for all systems.
r 1 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All conductors shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed. Materials omitted here but
necessary to complete the work are to be of comparable quality.
1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
' A. Deliver conductors and cables in complete coils with UL label and bearing manufacturer's name,
wire size, and type of insulation.
B. Store and handle materials so as not to subject them to corrosion or mechanical damage and in a
' manner to prevent damage from environment and construction operation.
C. Deliver conductors No. 10 and smaller in manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged
cartons with labels legible and intact.
1.04 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. None required.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be soft- drawn, or solid copper. Conductors larger than
No. 10 AWG shall be stranded, soft-drawn copper.
' B. Insulation for new conductors installed in raceways shall be "THWN" for conductors No. 8 AWG
or smaller, and "THWN" or "THHN" for conductors No. 6 AWG or larger, or as noted.
C. Where adverse conductor exposure exists, code - approved insulation suitable for the conditions
encountered shall be used unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.
D. All wire and cable for feeder circuits shall conform to the latest requirements of the current edition
' of the NEC and shall meet all ASTM Specifications. Wire and cable shall be new and have wire
size, grade of insulation, voltage, and manufacturer's name permanently marked on outer covering
at regular intervals.
E. Sizes shall not be less than indicated. Branch circuit conductors shall not be smaller than No. 12
' AWG. Class I remote control and signal circuit conductors shall not be less than No. 14 AWG.
Class 2 low energy remote control and signal circuit conductors shall not be less than No. 18
AWG.
F. All insulation shall be rated 600 volts unless noted otherwise.
G. Acceptable Manufacturers: General Electric, Hatfield, Anaconda, Rome Cable, Belden, West
Penn, or approved.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 111— CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16120 -1
Printed 03/03/05
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS •'
2.02 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
A. All connectors shall be solderless pressure type, properly taped. All taped joints shall be with
plastic tape, "Scotch 33," applied in half -lap layers without stretching to deform.
B. Splices shall utilize Scotch "Hyflex" or "Ideal" wing nut connector installed properly. Splices for
No. 8 and larger wires shall be made with tin or silver plated copper compression sleeves.
C. Terminate feeder conductors with indent/compression lugs. Set screw lugs are not permitted.
D. Splices made in handholes and manholes, or underground splices, shall be made water tight with
epoxy resin -type splicing kits.
E. Ground the shield of twisted, shielded pairs at one end only.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulation shall be removed with a stripping tool designated specifically for that purpose. All
conductors shall be left nick -free.
B. UL listed pulling compounds may be used with the residue cleaned from the conductors and
raceway entrances after the pull is made.
C. Raceway shall be complete, clean and free of burrs before pulling conductors.
D. Wire shall not be left extending out of exposed conduit stubs or incomplete raceways where
subject to mechanical injury.
E. Pulleys or blocks shall be used for alignment of the conductors when pulling. Pulling shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's specifications regarding tensions, bending radii of the cable and
compounds.
F. Conductors shall be terminated as required.
G. Conductor sizes for special systems shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer
except as noted.
H. Stranded conductors shall not be terminated with post and screw unless compression spade /ring 1
lug is utilized.
I. 120 -volt homeruns over 80 feet in length shall be minimum #10 conductor.
3.02 LABELING
A. Provide color coding of building wiring consistent throughout the work as listed herein, unless
required otherwise by local code authority. Band feeder conductors not available in colors where
clearly visible at each termination, tape or splice using two full wraps of 3/4" adhesive vinyl tape
or equally visible color marking corresponding to the following table.
Less than 250V between phases 251 to 600V btwn phases
Phase A - Black Phase A - Brown
Phase B - Red Phase B - Orange
Phase C - Blue Phase C - Yellow
Neutral - White Neutral - Gray
Ground - Green Ground - Green
B. Switch legs, travelers, etc., to be consistent with the above phases to which they are connected or
may be any other color distinctive from those listed above. Complex control circuits may utilize
any combination of colors but the identification shall be by labels throughout. Labeling shall be
accomplished by using computer - generated heat shrink labels suitable for the wire size used. In no
case will hand lettering or wraparound labels be accepted.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16120 -2
Printed 03/03/05
1
SECTION 16120
1 CONDUCTORS
C. Phase color code to be consistent at all feeder terminations, A -B -C left to right or A -B -C top to
I bottom.
D. Conductor identification shall be provided within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or
termination is made.
' E. Control circuit terminals of equipment shall be properly identified. Terminal and conductor
identification shall match that shown on approved shop drawings. Hand lettering or marking is not
acceptable.
3.03 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
A. Splices are to be made up completely promptly after wire installation. Single wire pigtails shall be
provided for fixture and device connections. Wire nuts may be used for fixture wire connections
to single wire circuit conductor pigtails.
3.04 CONNECTORS
' A. Control and special systems wires shall be terminated with a tool- applied, spade -flared lug when
terminating at a screw connection.
B. All screw and bolt -type connectors shall be made up tight and be retightened after an eight -hour
1 period.
C. All tool- applied compression connectors shall be applied per manufacturer's recommendations and
physically checked for tightness.
D. Check terminations in all panelboards, switchgear, motor control centers, etc., six months after
completion of installation. Supply a confirming letter to the Owner at completion of test.
3.05 TESTS
A. Perform insulation resistance tests on all feeders and circuits over 100 A, 480 volt and below, with
a 1,000 volt megger. The written test report listing the results of the test to be included in the
Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Equipment which may be damaged by this test shall be
disconnected prior to the test.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 02054
MAR 05 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE II1 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16120 -3
Printed 03/03/05
I'
SECTION 16130
(' BOXES
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
B. The requirements of this section apply to electrical boxes. Provide all outlet boxes, junction
l boxes, pull boxes and special boxes required for pulling of wires, making connections, and
mounting of devices or fixtures.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All boxes shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed. Where special fabrication is required,
the work shall be performed by a listed facility in accordance with UL 50, and all products of
manufacture shall bear a label. Outlet and junction boxes shall be sized in accordance with NEC
I requirements for "THHN" wire or as noted on Drawings.
1.03 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. Submit product data for floor boxes. Submit shop drawings for nonstandard boxes, enclosures,
and cabinets. Include layout drawings showing components and wiring.
I PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BOXES
Pi A. Boxes for use with raceway systems shall not be less than 4" square and 1 -1/2" deep except where
shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved.
B. Flush and Concealed Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel with screw ears, knock -out plugs, '
I mounting holes, fixture studs if required.
C. Surface Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel same as above for use on ceilings and walls
above 14 feet.
I D. Boxes shall be of the cast -metal hub type when located in normally wet locations and when surface
mounted on outside of exterior surfaces.
I E. Boxes installed for concealed wiring shall be provided with suitable extension rings or plastic
covers as required.
F. Cast -metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with the outside of exterior
I surfaces shall be gasketed.
G. Provide boxes suitable for the intended environment and sized as required to accommodate the
equipment within.
I H. Pull boxes of not Tess than the minimum size required by the National Electrical Code shall be
constructed of code -gauge aluminum or galvanized sheet steel except where cast -metal boxes are
required in locations specified above. Boxes shall be furnished with screw - fastener covers. Where
I several feeders pass through a common pull box, the feeders shall be tagged to indicate clearly the
electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MOUNTING
I A. Outlet boxes shall be designed for the intended use. Flush outlet boxes shall be installed flush with
finished surface lines.
I 02054
MAR 05 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 1I1 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16130 -1
Printed 03/03/05
SECTION 16130
BOXES
B. Outlet boxes on flex connected fixtures shall be installed within five feet of conduit knock -out in
fixture.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements to ensure
adequate head room, working clearance, and access to both boxes and other equipment.
END OF SECTION 1
•
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 111— CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16130 -2
Printed 03/03/05
1
SECTION 16140
1 WIRING DEVICES
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
B. Provide all wiring devices and finish plates as required unless specifically indicated otherwise.
I 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed and NEC approved.
1 B. Wiring devices shall be specification grade, with special devices as noted on the Drawings.
Should the Drawings indicate a device other than those listed herein, such device shall be of same
grade and manufacture as specified below.
I C. All lighting switches and duplex receptacles installed shall be from the same manufacturer and
have identical appearance characteristics.
I 1.03 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION
• A. Submit product data for wiring devices and cover plates.
I PART 2 - PRODUCTS
01 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Wall Switches: 20 ampere, 120/277 volt AC, quiet type, Hubbell 1221 Series, color to follow
Owner's standards. Single pole, double pole, 3 -way, locking, or other type as indicated.
I B. Receptacles: Single and duplex receptacles shall be rated 20 amperes, 125 volts, two -pole, three-
wire, grounded type, Hubbell 5362 Series. Receptacles shall have nylon faces, one -piece brass
mounting strap with integral ground contacts and bypass power contacts; color to follow Owner's
standards.
1 C. Receptacles with ground fault interrupters shall be in accordance with UL requirements.
D. Special purpose or heavy duty receptacles shall be of the type and of ratings and number of poles
I indicated or required for the anticipated purpose. Contact surfaces may be either round or
rectangular. One appropriate straight or angle -type plug shall be furnished with each receptacle.
Locking facilities, where indicated, shall be accomplished by the rotation of the plug.
E. Device plates of the one -piece type shall be provided for all outlets and fittings to suit the devices
I installed. Plates on unfinished walls and on fittings shall be of zinc - coated sheet steel, cast metal,
or impact resistant plastic having rounded or beveled edges. Plates on finished walls shall be
stainless steel.
I F. Receptacles in wet locations shall be in a weatherproof enclosure, the integrity of which is not
affected when the receptacle is in use.
I 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Hubbell, Cooper, P &S, and Leviton.
1 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
1 A. Devices and finish plates to be installed plumb with building lines.
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16140 -1
Printed 03/03/05
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
B. Finish plates and devices not to be installed until final painting is complete. Scratched or
splattered finish plates and devices will not be accepted.
C. Wall mounted receptacles shall be installed vertically at centerline height shown on the Drawings
unless otherwise specified.
D. Plates shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces
without the use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings will not be permitted. Plates shall be
installed with an alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch.
E. All outlets shall have a cover plate. Provide blank cover plate to match surrounding area if none
other is specified.
F. Devices shall be `back wired' when installed.
3.02 TESTS
A. Test all receptacles for line to line, line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground, opens or
1
shorts, and correct defective wiring.
3.03 LABELING
A. See Section 16195, Electrical Identification. 1
END OF SECTION
1
•
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16140 -2
Printed 03/03/05
1
SECTION 16190
I ' SUPPORTING DEVICES
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
B. Provide all electrical equipment and wiring with adequate supports of specified type required for a
1 complete installation.
1.02 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION
t A. Submit shop drawings indicating details of fabricated products and materials.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
I 2.01 FASTENERS
A. Fastenings shall be by wood screws or screw -type nails to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow
I masonry units; by expansion bolts on concrete or brick; by machine screws, welded threaded studs,
heat - treated or spring steel tension clamps on steel work; for new concrete installation use cast -in-
concrete inserts. Kindorf D -255 or approved.
I B. Hammer - driven and trigger -fired anchors may be used only after obtaining specific written
authorization from the Architect.
IP , 2.02 OUTLET BOX SUPPORTS
A. Wood Stud Walls: Adjustable bar hangers with "C" channel cross section Steel City 6010 series,
or approved, or mounted on solid blocking. 4 -inch square boxes adjacent to wood studs may be
side nailed and back braced with Steel City No. 50 box brace.
I B. Light steel construction, bar hangers with 1 -inch long studs between metal studs or metal stud "C"
brackets snapped on and tab - locked to metal studs.
I C. Concrete or masonry walls where boxes are not cast in place. Flush anchors or concrete inserts.
D. Flush Ceiling Outlets: Steel City 6010 series or equal bar hangers.
I 2.03 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. One Hole Malleable Straps: Steel City, Appleton, T &B, Diamond, Raco, or approved.
I B. Conduit Clips: Caddy, Raco, or approved.
C. Nail -Up Straps: 1/2" through 1", Raco 2252, 2253, 2254, or approved.
D. Adjustable Hangers for Conduits 1 -1/2" and Larger: Steel City C -149 with threaded steel rod of
proper size.
E. Adjustable trapeze hangers to support groups of parallel conduits; Steel City B -905 steel channel,
I H -119 square washer, C -105 strap, threaded rod. Components of Unistrut, Globe Strut, Harvey
Alstrut, Kindorf, or approved.
2.04 HANGER ROD ATTACHMENTS
I A. Side Beam Connector, Kindorf E -244; 90 degree fitting, Kindorf B -916; clamp type anchor clips
Kindorf Type "C," Unistrut P2675 or approved, spot type concrete insert Kindorf B -255 with
"Gals -Krom" finish.
1
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16190 -1
Printed 03/03/05
1
1
SECTION 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES • I
2.05 SUPPORT CHANNELS .
•
A. Conduit: Kindorf B -905 with Galv -Krom finish, and C -105 single bolt channel pipe straps.
B. Lighting: Kindorf B -900 with G -969 closure strip and G -977 swing connector.
C. Recessed in Concrete: Kindorf D -980 with D -982 anchored end caps and D -983 joiner clips.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION 1
•
A. Every fastening device and support for electrical equipment (includes fixtures, panels, outlets,
conduits, and cabinets) shall be capable of sustaining not less than four times the ultimate weight
I
of the object or objects. Fasten support to the building or a building structural member.
B. Provide independent supports to the building or building structural member for electrical fixtures,
materials, or equipment installed in or on ceiling, walls, or in void spaces and/or over the furred or
I
suspended ceilings. Chain or additional ceiling wires may be used for light fixture supports.
C. Other crafts' fastening devices shall not be used for the supporting means of electrical, equipment,
materials, or fixtures. I
D. Supports and/or fastening devices shall not be used to support more than one particular item.
E. Vertical support members for equipment and fixtures shall be straight and parallel to building
1
walls.
F. Examine all equipment locations to determine type of supports required.
G. Raceways or pipe straps shall not be welded to steel structures.
H. Holes cut to a depth of more than 1 -1/2" in reinforced concrete beams or to a depth of more than
3/4" in concrete joists shall avoid cutting the main reinforcing bars. Holes not used shall be filled.
3.02 BOXES I
A. Boxes and pendants for surface - mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings shall be supported
independently of the ceiling supports.
1
B. In open overhead spaces, cast metal boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported
except where used for fixture support; cast metal boxes having threadless connectors and sheet
metal boxes shall be supported directly from the building structure or by bar hangers.
I
C. Where bar hangers are used, the bar shall be attached to raceways on opposite sides of the box and
the raceway shall be supported with an approved fastener not more than 24" from the box.
3.03 RACEWAYS I
A. Support conduits within 18" of outlets, boxes, panels, cabinets, couplings, elbows, and deflections.
Maximum distance between supports shall not exceed ten (10) foot spacing.
I
B. Conduit up to and including 1" EMT may be supported from ceiling fixture wires by conduit clips
or other approved devices only with written approval of the installer of the ceiling support system.
All other conduit runs shall be secured to the structure by two -hole straps or supported on Kindorf
I
or Unistrut hangers. Wire will not be permitted for supporting conduit. All visible conduit runs
will be parallel to the building structural lines.
C. Anchor conduit installed in poured concrete to the steel reinforcing with No. 14 black iron wire.
I
D. In partitions of light steel construction, sheet metal screws may be used, and bar hangers may be
attached with saddle - suspended ceiling construction only. Lighting system branch circuit raceways
shall be fastened to the ceiling supports.
I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS I
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16190 -2
Printed 03/03/05
1
SECTION 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES
E. Support suspended feeder conduits by metal ring or trapeze hangers with threaded steel rods. Wire
ties to prevent displacement, using not less than No. 14 iron wire, may be used only for concealed
runs in concrete for conduit up to 1 -1/4 ".
F. At main distribution and surface mounted branch panels and cabinets where conduit exits from the
' top, provide support channels on wall 24" above panel and at 6' -0" intervals from there on for
support of conduits.
END OF SECTION
•
i
1
1
1
PI
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR OS TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 1 6190 -3
. Printed 03/03/05
1
SECTION 16195
I ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
B. Clearly and properly label the complete electrical system to indicate the loads served or the
1 function of each item of equipment connected under this work.
1.02 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION
1 A. None required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1 2.01 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS
A. Unless otherwise specified, all identification nameplates shall be made of laminated three -ply
I plastic in accordance with Fed. Spec. L -P -387 equal to "Lamicoid." Nameplates shall be minimum
1/16" thick, with black outer layers and a white core, red outer ply for all emergency applications.
Edges shall be chamfered. •
I B. Provide identification nameplates for starters, switchboards, safety switches, panelboards, motor
control centers, transformers, equipment (air handling units, exhaust fans, pumps, etc.), with a
minimum of 1/4" high letters.
PI C. Provide identification nameplates for control power transformers, control devices (relays,
contactors, etc.), with a minimum of 1/8" high letters.
D. Where switches control remote lighting, exhaust fans, or power outlets, or where switches in the
1 same gang (two or more) serve different purposes, such as light, power, intercom, etc., or different
areas, such as corridor and outlet, furnish engraved cover plates with 1/8" black letters indicating
function of each switch or outlet.
1 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 LABELING
I A. Major items of electrical equipment and major components shall be permanently marked with an
identification nameplate to identify the equipment by type or function and specific unit number as
shown on the Drawings.
I B. Provide typewritten branch panel schedules with protective clear, transparent covers accounting
for every breaker installed. Use actual room designations assigned by name or number near
completion of the work, and not the designation on the construction drawings. Minimum panel
I schedule width shall be 4" with 1/4" height allowed for each circuit line. Panel schedules shall be
the type which install in a metal frame or pocket. Panel schedules shall be of the odd /even
sequence (1- 3- 5- 7 -9... and 2- 4- 6- 8- 10...).
I C. Identify service entrance and distribution switchboards with engraved nameplate corresponding
with the plans, mounted on the face of the switchboard. Identify each feeder, breaker, and switch
with engraved nameplate corresponding with the plans.
I D. Identify branch panels with engraved nameplate corresponding with the main or subdistribution
panel labeling, mounted on the face of the door. No brand labels or other markings shall be on the
outside of the panels.
1 E. Label all disconnect switches, relays, contactors, starters and time switches indicating voltage,
amperage, power panel source, circuit number and equipment served with laminated plastic label.
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III - CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR O5 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16195 -1
Printed 03/03/05
SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
1
F. All junction boxes are to be labeled with a `high quality' label maker.
G. All receptacle covers are to be labeled with panel and circuit number. Use `high quality' label 1
maker.
H. `High quality' label maker to be approved for use by Owner. 1
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16195 -2
Printed 03 /03/05
1
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
B. Provide ground system as specified herein, as shown on the Drawings, and as required by NEC and
1 other rules and regulations pertaining to grounding.
1.02 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. None required.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
' 2.01 GROUND CONDUCTORS
A. Equipment or grounding conductors shall be soft drawn copper, stranded and, if insulated, shall
' have green insulation.
2.02 GROUNDING BUSHINGS/WEDGES
A. Sufficient ampacity with grounding conductor set screw connection.
2.03 CONNECTOR
A. Cast, set screw or bolted type.
2.04 GROUND RODS
A. Copper -clad steel, not less than 3/4" in diameter, 8' long, driven full length into the earth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All grounding conductors shall be sized in accordance with Article 250 of the NEC.
' B. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non - current - carrying metallic parts of
electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be
grounded.
' C. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment and shall be extended to the
point of entrance of the metallic water service. Connection to the water pipe shall be made by a
suitable ground clamp. If flanged pipes are encountered, connection shall be made with the lug
I bolted to the street side of the flange connection.
D. Where the metallic water service is used, it shall be grounded as described by Article 250 of the
NEC.
1 E. Generally, all supplemental grounding electrodes shall be ground rods.
F. All ground wire connections below finished grade, cast in concrete, or bonding solid wire shall be
I exothermically welded.
G. Where there is no metallic water service to the building, ground connections shall be made to
driven ground rods on the exterior of the building.
' • 02054
MAR 05 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 1l1 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16450 -1
Printed 03/03/05
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING
H. The maximum resistance measured in accordance with IEEE Standards of a driven ground shall
not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a
single rod, additional rods shall be installed not less than 6' on centers, or if sectional -type rods are
used, additional sections may be coupled and driven with the first rod. If the resultant resistance
exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, the Engineer shall be notified
immediately. •
Grounding conductor connectors shall be made up tight and located for future servicing and to
ensure low impedance.
J. The Contractor shall submit in writing to the Owner upon completion of the project the measured
ground resistance of each ground rod, indicating the location of the rod and the resistance and the
soil conditions at the time the measurements were made.
K. Where new circuits are to be served by existing panels with no ground bus, provide supplemental
copper ground bus in panel.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCI -FOOL DISTRICT 23J 16450 -2
Printed 03/03/05
1
SECTION 16500
• LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS .
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and
other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
B. Provide all lighting outlets indicated on the Drawings with a fixture of the type designated and
I appropriate for the location. Outlet symbols on the Drawings without a type designation shall have
a fixture the same as those used in similar or like locations.
C. Provide lamps for all fixtures.
I D. Coordinate installation of fixtures with the ceiling installation and all other trades to provide a total
system that is neat and of orderly appearance.
I 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fixtures shall conform to the following specifications. .
I B. The lighting designated for this project was based on fixture types and manufacturers as specified.
C. Manufacturers specified are indicative of the general type and performance desired and are not
intended to restrict selection to fixtures of any particular manufacturer. Fixtures of similar designs
1 and equivalent light distribution and brightness characteristics, and of equal finish and quality will
be acceptable if approved by the Architect prior to the bid.
D. Equality shall be determined by comparisons of performance, construction, installation ease,
PI maintenance, and appearance.
E. All light fixtures shall be UL listed and labeled.
1.03 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. Submit product data describing fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units. Arrange
product data for fixtures in order of fixture designation.
I B. Include data on features and accessories and the following information.
1. Outline drawings of fixtures indicating dimensions and principle features.
2. Electrical ratings and photometric data with specified lamps and certified results of
laboratory tests.
I 3. Data on batteries and chargers of emergency lighting units.
C. Submit shop drawings from manufacturers detailing nonstandard fixtures and indicating
dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.
1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1 2.01 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A. Existing recessed fluorescent fixtures are to be relocated as shown on the contract documents.
Verify proper operation and condition of fixtures prior to relocation. Notify the architect of any
required repairs. All relocated fixtures are to be relamped in accordance with this specification.
B. Lamps shall be as follows:
1. 4' linear fluorescent shall be as follows:
I a.
b. 32 watt, "T -8," rapid start.
Minimum 2900 lumens.
c. 3500 K color temperature.
d. 85 CRI.
I
e. 20,000 hours average rated life.
I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16500 -1
Printed 03/03/05
•
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
•
f. Shall have low mercury content, meeting the EPA's Toxic Characteristics Leaching
Procedure (TCLP), for disposal as non - hazardous waste
• 2. Fluorescent lamp approved manufacturers: General Electric, Osram/Sylvania, Philips. 1
2.03 FIXTURES
A. See Drawings for Fixture List. •
PART 3 EXECUTION 1
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Lamp s of the proper type, e , watta g e, and voltage rating shall be delivered to the project in the
original cartons and installed in the fixtures just prior to the completion of the project. Provide
lamp type as recommended by the fixture manufacturer.
• B. Fixtures shall be left clean at the time of acceptance of the work with every lamp in operation. If
fixtures are deemed dirty by the Architect at completion of the project, the Contractor shall clean
them.
C. Fixtures shall be carefully aligned, leveled in straight lines, and located as shown on the
Architectural reflected ceiling plan. The final decision as to adequacy of support and alignment
shall be made by the Architect. The fixtures shall be supported and fastened to the ceiling system.
D. Verify all ceiling conditions and provide all lighting fixtures complete with factory furnished
stems, balls, aligners, and canopies as required for a complete installation. •
E. Recessed fluorescent troffers installed in suspended T -bar ceiling shall be independently supported
on two opposite corners by #12 gauge steel wire attached to structure, per UBC Standard.
F. Surface mounted light fixtures shall be securely fastened to the building surface via factory- created
holes in the fixtures. Attachment of fixture merely to recessed outlet box is not sufficient.
G. Lighting fixtures in any single enclosed room shall be connected using a common (one) circuit,
except in cases where the loading requires a second circuit.
H. Accessories such as straps, mounting plates, nipples, or brackets shall be provided for proper
installation.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 1I1 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16500 -2
Printed 03/03/05
1
SECTION 16723
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
1
I PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
I A. The Contractor shall provide modifications to the existing Simplex 4020 fire alarm system as
specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings.
B. The modifications shall include signal initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, remote
I power supplies, battery back -up, a conduit and wiring system, and all accessory devices required to
provide a functional system. Wiring and system connections to fire alarm equipment furnished and
installed by the other divisions are included to the extent that device locations are shown on the
Drawings.
I 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the National Fire Protection Association
I Standard Number. 70, "National Electrical Code," Standard Number 72, "National Fire Alarm
Code," and meet all requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction.
B. All equipment and devices shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or approved by
I Factory Mutual Laboratories and shall meet Federal Specification Standards.
C. All material and equipment shall match existing system.
D. All equipment located on the exterior of the building shall be weatherproof.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Pi A. In addition to the items outlined in Section 16050, include the following:
1. Shop Drawings shall include complete wiring and schematic diagrams for equipment
furnished, equipment layout, battery calculations, and other details.
2. Product data for system components. Include dimensioned plans and elevations showing
' 3. minimum clearances and installed features and devices.
Include performance field test reports with operation and maintenance manuals.
1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 INITIATING DEVICES
I A. • Low profile photo electronic -type smoke detectors shall be self - restoring (not requiring resetting or
readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation). Detector and associated
encapsulated electronic components shall be mounted in a module that connects to a fixed base
with a twist - locking plug connection. The plug connection shall require no springs for secure
I mounting and contact maintenance. Terminals in the fixed base shall accept building wiring. Shall
have a visual indicator connected to indicate the detector has operated.
B. Manual Pull Station: Semi -flush, red enamel finish, single action. Station to be keyed the same as
I the fire control panel. Addressed at the time of installation. Provide clear Lexan shield which
requires lifting to access pull station. Shield shall have a warning horn
C. Thermal heat detectors shall be low- profile, combination rate -of -rise and fixed temperature, 135°
I F, nonnally open contacts.
D. A common key to reset the manual stations and to open all fire alarm cabinets shall be provided.
I E. Duct smoke detector shall be photo electronic -type, with sampling tube of design and dimensions
as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific duct size and installation conditions where
applied. Detector shall include relay and /or auxillary contacts as required for fan shutdown and
smoke damper operation. Housing shall be suitable for the environment in which it is located, and
1 shall be accessible for maintenance purposes. Provide remote indicator light for detectors hidden
I 02054
MAR 05 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16723 -1
. Printed 03/03/05
1
SECTION 16723
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
behind construction. 1
2.02 AUDIBLE VISUAL ALARM DEVICES
A. Horns shall be of sufficient number so that an alarm shall be clearly audible to all occupants of the
building and/or fire area, as required by these specifications. Mounting height shall be 96" inches
to the centerline of the unit above the finished floor. Locations where ceilings prevent the
installation at 96 "inches centerline, the centerline of the unit shall be 6" inches below the ceiling.
B. Audible alarm signals shall produce a sound level at least 15 dBA above the average ambient
sound level or 5 dBA above the maximum sound level having a duration of at least 60 seconds
(whichever is greater) measured 5 feet above the floor in each occupiable area. The average
ambient sound level is the root mean square, a weighted sound pressure measured over a 24 -hour
period.
C. Strobes shall be installed as shown on the drawings in accordance with the requirements of the UL
1971 standard and NFPA 72. Where multiple visual notification appliances can be seen from any
location, circuitry shall be incorporated for the synchronization of flash rate.
1. Strobes shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second minimum over the listed
input voltage (20VDC — 31 VDC) range.
2. Strobes shall incorporate a Zenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan lens or equivalent
with solid state circuitry.
3. Strobe intensity shall be rated per UL 1971 for 15/75, 30/75, 60/75, 75 or 110 Candela.
Dual listing strobes of 15/75 intensity for UL 1971 /near -axis requirements shall be used
where acceptable.
4. Strobes shall be available for semi -flash or surface mounting and in conjunction with
audible appliances as required.
2.03 APPROVED EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturers: Shall match existing Simplex 4020 system.
2.04 WIRING
A. Provide all required wiring in accordance with local and national. Unless otherwise specified,
minimum wire size shall be 16 gauge for audible /visual alarm circuits, and 18 gauge for signal
initiating circuits.
B. Wiring in accessible locations (i.e. above removable ceiling tiles) may be open fire alarm cable.
Wiring in inaccessible locations (i.e. walls, above gyp ceilings) shall be in a conduit raceway
system. The contractor has the option to re -use the existing fire alarm raceway system if applicable
and found to be in good condition. All conductors installed in existing raceway shall be THHN.
Verify wiring with equipment supplier and increase conduit size where required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION 1
A. The contractor shall install the entire system per the supplier or manufacturer's instructions. The
equipment supplier shall provide supervision of final installation.
B. The equipment manufacturer shall be represented by a local service organization and the name of
this organization shall be furnished to the Owner.
C. The contractor shall include in the basic bid all installation charges rendered by the supplier.
1
3.02 TESTING AND SERVICE
A. The contractor shall notify the Owner 30 days before the performance and acceptance tests are to
be conducted. A factory trained representative of the manufacturer shall supervise the final testing
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE Il.t — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16723 -2
Printed 03/03/05
111 SECTION 16723
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
I of the system and it shall be subject to the approval and acceptance of the Owner.
I B. Prior to final inspection, test, clean and calibrate the entire system. All control equipment, manual
stations, audible alarms, remote lights, flow switches, etc., must be installed and wired.
C. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for the tests. Tests shall be
I conducted for the following:
1. Verify that the system is free of grounds or open circuits.
2. Verify that all horns, stations, transmitters, automatic detectors, and supervisory devices
1 3. are functioning as specified.
Reconducted to verify correction of any defect found in the initial testing.
D. After completion of all the tests and adjustments listed above, the Contractor shall submit the
following information to the Owner:
I 1. As- installed conduit layout diagrams including wire color code and tag number.
2. Complete as- installed wiring diagrams.
3. Detailed catalog data on all installed system components.
I 4.
5. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals.
Copies of the technician's certified report (as above).
6. Provide the above in bound manual. See section of this Specification covering Record
Information.
1 3.03 GUARANTEE
A. Th'e Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring free from inherent mechanical or
electrical defects for one year from date of Owner acceptance.
3.04 SERVICE AGREEMENT
PI A. The manufacturer shall furnish gratis to the Owner a one year contract effective from date of
acceptance for maintenance and inspection service of the manufacturer's equipment with a
minimum of two inspections during the contract year, the final inspection to occur no sooner than
30 days prior to warranty expiration.
1 3.05 INSTRUCTIONS
A. After the system is complete and all tests are made, the system manufacturer's representative shall
I instruct the operating personnel as designated by the owner giving them instructions and
information as to the system operation and minor servicing. This period of instruction to be not
less than 4 hours.
I B. The operating personnel shall be shown the location of each item of equipment installed including
equipment panels, terminal cabinets, etc.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16723 -3
Printed 03/03/05
1 t
SECTION 16735
GPS WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM
I PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
I A. Section Includes: Division 1 applies to this section. Provide GPS wireless clocks, complete.
Transmitter and GPS receiver are existing.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 120 volt grounded electrical outlet at transmitter location.
1 1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. GPS: Global Positioning System, a worldwide system that employs 24 satellites in an integrated
I network to determine geographic location anywhere in the world, and which employs and transmits
atomic time, the most accurate and reliable time.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
I A. GPS wireless clock system shall continually synchronize clocks throughout the facility, and shall • be capable of clock readouts in multiple time zones where desired.
I B. The system shall synchronize all clocks to each other. The system shall utilize GPS technology to
provide atomic time. The system shall not require hard wiring. Clocks shall automatically adjust
for Daylight Savings Time.
C. Analog Clocks shall be synchronized to within 10 milliseconds 6 times per day, and the system
I shall have an internal oscillator that maintains plus or minus one second per day between
synchronizations, so that clock accuracy shall not exceed plus or minus 0.2 seconds.
ill D. The system shall include an internal clock reference so that failure of the GPS signal shall not
cause the clocks to fail in indicating time.
E. The system shall incorporate a "fail- safe" design so that failure of any component shall not cause
failure of the system. Upon restoration of power or repair of failed component, the system shall
resume normal operation without the need to reset the system or any component thereof.
F. Clock locations shall be as indicated, and clocks shall be fully portable, capable of being relocated
•
at any time.
I 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment and components furnished shall be of manufacturers latest model.
1 B. System shall be installed in compliance with local and state authorities having jurisdiction.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
1 A. Product Data: Submit complete catalog data for each component, describing physical
characteristics and method of installation. Submit brochure showing available colors and finishes
of clocks.
I 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all components to the site in the manufacturer's original packaging. Packaging shall
I contain manufacturer's name and address, product identification number, and other related
information.
B. Store equipment in finished building, unopened containers until ready for installation.
' 1.07 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
A. Clocks shall not be installed until painting and other finish work in each room is complete.
1
' 02054
MAR 05 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16735 -1
Printed 03/03/05
•
1
SECTION 16735
GPS WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM
1.08 SYSTEM STARTUP 1
A. At completion of installation and prior to final acceptance, turn on the equipment, ensure that all
equipment is operating properly, and that all clocks are functioning.
•
PART 2 PRODUCTS
I
2.01 MANUFACTURER
•
• A. GPS wireless clock system shall be manufactured by Primex Wireless, Inc., N3211 County Road 111 H, Lake Geneva WI 53147 (800) 537 -0464 FAX (262) 248 -0061 www.primexwireless.com.
2.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Transmitter Operation: When power is first applied to the transmitter, it checks for and displays
I
the software version, then it checks the position of the switches and stores their position in
memory. The transmitter then looks for the GPS time signal. Once the transmitter has received the
GPS time, it sets its internal clock to that time. The transmitter then starts to transmit its internal I
time once every second. The transmitter updates its internal clock every time it receives valid time
data from the GPS.
B. Analog Clock Operation: I
1. When the batteries are inserted into the clock: A) Press the red button when the red
second hand is at the 12:00 position. At this time the microprocessor will lock in the
location of the second hand.
a. After the red second hand has passed over the minute hand (first second hash
I
mark after minute hand), press and release the red button. At this time the
microprocessor will lock in the location of the minute hand. The microprocessor
then assumes the location of the hour hand.
2. After the red button has been pressed twice, the micro processor will start searching the
channels. It will start at channel No. 1 and proceed one by one until it either decodes a
valid signal or reaches channel No. 16. If no signal is detected the receiver will be shut off
and will try again later. If a signal is received, the micro processor will store the channel
number, set the clock to the receive the time. For the next minute the clock will beep
every time that it receives a valid time signal. If the clock is in a good signal area it will
I
beep once a second. If the clock beeps every few seconds, the clock is in a marginal
signal area. Analog clocks can operate in marginal signal areas, but battery life will be
about 25 percent shorter.
3. After initial set, the clock will shut off the receiver. On a pre - scheduled basis, the
I
microprocessor will turn the receiver back on and starting with the•stored channel, it will
again look for a valid time signal. However, the beeper will not operate.
4. If the clock has not decoded a valid time signal for seven days, then it will go back to a
double -step mode. Non - signal reception can be caused by low battery voltage. If this
I
occurs, replace the batteries.
2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. General: The clock system shall include a transmitter, a roof or window mounted GPS receiver, 1
• indicating clocks, and all accessories for complete operation. -
B. Existing Transmitter: Primex Wireless Model FM -72, consisting of wireless transmitter with GPS
receiver. Unit shall obtain current atomic time from satellite. The clock system shall transmit time
I
continuously to all clocks in the system.
C. Existing GPS Receiver: Model Number Q11695, GPS roof mounted, with cable attached.
I
Contractor to provide cable length as required.
E. Traditional Analog Clocks: Match existing Primex Wireless analog clocks, 12 -1/2 inch diameter or
16 inch diameter as selected, color and finish as selected from manufacturer's standard colors and
I
finishes. Analog clocks shall be wall mounted, and 12 -1/2 inch diameter clocks shall have
polycarbonate frame and polycarbonate lens. Face shall be white. Hour and minute hands shall be
black. Analog clocks shall be provided with red sweep second hand.
1. 12 -1/2 inch analog clocks shall be battery- operated, and shall have 5 -year battery life.
I
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16735 -2
Printed 03/03/05
1 SECTION 16735
GPS WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM
I 2. Analog clocks shall be capable of automatically adjusting for Daylight Saving Time. An
on -off switch located on the transmitter shall disable this function if desired.
3. Time shall be automatically updated from the transmitter 6 times per day.
' 4. Analog clocks shall remember the time during changing of batteries.
5. 12 -1/2 inch analog clock lock: Tamper - proof/theft resistant hangers and slots in the backs
of the analog clocks.
I 6.
7. Provide 2 alkaline D -cell batteries with each 12 -1/2 or 16 -inch analog clock.
Analog clock receivers shall be as follows:
a. Receiver sensitivity: > -110 dBm
b. Receiver power: two alkaline D -cells
' c. Antenna type: internal
d. Antenna gain: -7 dBd
8. If transmitter stops transmitting valid time signals due to power failure, the clocks will
continue to function as accurate quartz clocks until a valid time signal is decoded.
9. Analog clock faces shall bear Owner's logo as indicated.
I F. Wire guards: Provide as indicated on the drawings.
1. Model No. 14131, 14 by 14 inch size, for nominal 12 -1/2 inch diameter analog clocks.
2. Model No. 14123, 18 by 18 inch size, for 16 inch diameter analog clocks.
I G. Cable Connection Sealant: Radio Shack Coaxial Cable Connector Sealant 278 -1645, or approved
electrical grade silicone sealant.
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
1 A. Verify that construction is complete in spaces to receive equipment and that rooms are clean and
dry.
0 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Analog clocks: Perform the following operations with each clock:
1. Install D -cell batteries.
I 2.
3. Set clock to correct time in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Observe analog clock until valid signals are received and analog clock adjusts itself to
correct time.
4. Install the analog clock on the wall in the indicated location, plumb, level and tight
against wall. If using 12 -1/5 inch clock, attach using clock -lock hanging method and
suitable fasteners as approved by clock manufacturer.
B. Wire guards: Secure to wall, using approved theft- resistant fasteners.
I 3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Prior to final acceptance, inspect each clock, adjust as required, and replace parts which are found
defective.
1 3.04 CLEANING
A. Prior to final acceptance, clean exposed surfaces of clocks, using cleaning methods recommended
I by clock manufacturer. Remove temporary labels from clock faces. Do not remove labels from
backs of clocks.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
I A. Provide training to Owner's representative on setting and adjusting clocks, replacing batteries and
routine maintenance.
I 3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation until final acceptance of the project.
1
I 02054
MAR 05 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16735 -3
Printed 03/03/05
SECTION 16735 •
GPS WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III - CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16735 -4
Printed 03/03/05
1
SECTION 16740
DATA, TELEPHONE, AND CATV SYSTEMS
' PART1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
' A. Provide the system of conduits, pull boxes, outlet boxes, and other associated equipment specified
herein and as shown on the Drawings for data, telephone, and CATV systems.
B. All wiring, instruments, terminal equipment, etc., will be provided by others.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
' 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Outlet Boxes: 4" square, 2 -1/8" deep minimum with 2 -gang device ring.
1 B. Data/Telephone Conduits: 1" minimum size with larger sizes as indicated on the Drawings.
C. CATV Conduits: 3 /4" minimum size with larger sizes as indicated on the Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Conduit bends shall be large radius field bends. No run shall have more than 270 degrees of total
bend radius.
PI B. Where conduits are stubbed into a terminal cabinet area, conduits shall be stubbed up 6" above
floor or 12" below ceiling and terminated with insulating bushings. Provide 80# test
polypropylene pull line in all conduits.
' C. Provide 3/4" raceway and #6 copper wire with green insulation from data/telephone rack to main
service ground bus.
D. Provide blank cover plate at all outlet locations, finish to be brushed stainless steel.
' E. Data, telephone, and CATV outlet boxes shall not be multiple gang boxes.
END OF SECTION
' 02054
MAR OS TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 111 — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16740 -1
Printed 03/03/05
1
SECTION 16900
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
' A. Provide lighting control equipment complete and operable as specified herein and as shown on the
Drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 A. All lighting control equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and shall comply with the NEC.
B. Comply with FCC Regulations of Part 15, Subpart J, for Class A.
' 1.03 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. Submit product data for lighting control equipment and systems components, including dimensions
and data on features and components. Include elevation views of front panels of control and
indicating devices. Include data on ratings.
B. Submit wiring diagrams detailing specific systems tailored to this Project and differentiating
' between factory- installed and field- installed wiring.
C. Submit maintenance data for lighting control equipment and systems components to include in the
operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
FART 2- PRODUCTS
Pi 2.01 TYPE 1 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. The passive infrared sensor shall be a completely self contained control system that replaces a
standard toggle switch. Switching mechanism shall be a latching air gap relay, compatible with
' electronic ballasts, compact fluorescent, and inductive loads. Triac and other harmonic generating
devices shall not be allowed. Sensor shall have ground wire and grounded strap for safety.
B. Sensor shall be capable of detecting presence in the control area by detecting changes in infrared
' energy. Small movements shall be detected, such as when a person is writing while seated at a
desk.
C. Sensor shall utilize advanced control logic based on RISC (Reduced Instruction -Set Circuit)
' microcontroller.
D. Detection Signature Processing (DSP) shall be used to avoid false offs and false activations and to
provide immunity to RFI and EMI.
' E. Continuously adjusting Zero Cross relay control shall be used to guarantee reliable operation with
non - linear loads (electronic, PL lamp ballasts) even with temperature changes and product aging.
This increases the WA -200 product longevity.
' F. Sensor shall utilize SmartSetTM technology to optimize the sensor behavior to fit occupant usage
patterns and adjust sensitivity and time delay to changing conditions. The use of SmartSet shall be
selectable by user with a DIP switch.
G. Sensor shall have a time delay that is adjusted automatically (with the SmartSet setting) or shall
have a fixed time delay of 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 minutes, walk- through mode, or test mode, set by
DIP switch. In walk- through mode, lights shall turn off 3 minutes after the area is initially
' occupied if no motion is detected after the first 30 seconds.
H. Sensor shall have the choice of light flash alert and / or audible alert of impending light shut off,
selectable with DIP switch.
1
' 02054
MAR 05 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16900 -1
Printed 03/03/05
•
1
SECTION 16900
LIGHTING CONTROLS 1 •
I. Sensor shall have sensitivity adjustment that is set to either automatic (Sinart Set setting) or reduced
sensitivity, and is set with DIP switch.
J. Sensor shall have a built -in Light level feature selectable with DIP switch. During setup of light
I
level control, sensor shall learn desired hold -off level, requiring only one step.
K. Sensor shall have automatic -ON or manual -ON operation adjustable with DIP switch.
I
L. Sensor shall operate at universal voltages of 100, 120, 230, or 277 VAC; 50/60 Hz.
M. Sensor shall have no minimum load requirement and shall be capable of switching 0 to 800 watts
I
fluorescent/incandescent or 1/6 hp at 100 /120VAC, 50/60 Hz; 0 to 1200 watts fluorescent or 1/6
hp at 230/277VAC, 50/60 Hz.
N. Sensor shall utilize a temperature compensated, dual element sensor, and a multi - element Fresnel
1
lens.
O. For vandal resistance, Fresnel lens shall be made of hard, 1.0nim Poly IR 2 material that offers
greater sensitivity to motion and superior detection performance. Lens shall have grooves facing
I
in to avoid dust and residue build up which affects IR reception.
P. To assure detection at desktop level uniformly across the space, sensor shall have a 2 level, 28
segment, multi- element Fresnel lens system. I
Q. Sensor shall cover up to 300 square feet for waling motion, with a field of view of 180 degrees.
R. Adjustments and mounting hardware shall be concealed under a removable, tamper resistant cover
1
to prevent tampering of adjustments and hardware.
S. For safety, sensor shall have a 100% off switch with no leakage current to the load.
T. Sensor shall not protrude more than 3/8" from the wall and shall blend in aesthetically.
4
U. To ensure quality and reliability, sensor shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified
manufacturing facility and shall have a defect rate of less than 1/3 of 1 %.
V. Sensor shall have standard 5 year warranty and shall be UL and CUL listed. 1
W. Manufacturers: Watt Stopper WA -200 to match previous work, no substitutions.
2.02 TYPE 2 OCCUPANCY SENSORS 1
A. The passive infrared ceiling- mounted sensor shall be capable of detecting presence in the floor
area to be controlled by detecting changes in the infrared energy. Small movements shall be 1
detected, such as when a person is writing while seated at a desk within 8 feet of the sensor.
B. The sensor shall utilize a temperature compensated, dual - element sensor and a multi - element
Fresnel lens. 1
C. The sensor shall have a daylight filter which ensures that the sensor is insensitive to short-
wavelength infrared waves such as those emitted by the sun.
D. Fresnel lens shall be a Poly IR 2 based material to offer superior performance in the infrared
I
wavelengths. Lens shall have grooves facing inward to avoid dust and residue build -up which
affects IR reception.
E. The sensor shall not protrude more than 0.36" from the ceiling and shall blend in aesthetically. 1
F. The sensor shall have one occupancy -based output.
G. The sensor shall have a digital time delay, adjustable from 15 seconds to 30 minutes. 1
H. Sensitivity adjustment with DIP switch shall be adjustable from minimum to maximum.
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCI -IOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 1II — CE2 /TRANSITIONS 1
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16900 -2
Printed 03/03/05
1
SECTION 16900
. LIGHTING CONTROLS
1
I. Adjustments and mounting hardware shall be concealed under a removable cover to prevent
I tampering with adjustments and hardware.
J. Sensor shall cover 360° and up to 1200 square feet for walking motion when mounted at a ceiling
height of 12 feet.
I K. The sensor shgall have normally open, normally closed, and common outputs rated at 1 amp at 24
VDC and 1/2 amp at 120 VAC.
I L. The sensor shall operate on 24 VDC with a current draw not to exceed 15 mA.
M. Multiple sensors shall be capable of parallel wiring to allow coverage of large areas.
I N. The sensor shall have a standard five -year warranty.
O. The sensor shall be UL listed and labeled.
P. Manufacturers: Watt Stopper CI -200 series with an `isolated relay' to match previous work, no
I substitutions.
2.03 OCCUPANCY SENSOR POWER PACK
I A. Power pack shall provide 24 VDC operating voltage to occupancy sensors and be capable of
switching 20 amps of electrical load.
B. Power pack shall consist of a transformer and high - current relay in a single small package.
' C. Power pack shall be available in 120, 240, and 277 volt supply voltage.
0
D. Power pack shall have a plastic enclosure.
E. Power pack shall be able to externally mount through a 1/2" knock -out on a standard electrical
enclosure.
1 F. Power pack leads shall be Teflon - coated for use in plenums.
G. Manufacturers: Watt Stopper or approved equal.
1 PART3- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
1 A. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to locate and aim sensors in the correct location required
for a complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage of controlled areas per
the manufacturer's recommendations. The contractor shall provide the quantity of sensors
I necessary to properly and completely cover each room indicated to have occupancy sensing.
B. The contractor shall provide power packs as required to accomplish the occupancy sensing
indicated.
I C. Mount power packs to junction boxes in accessible locations and per the manufacturer's
instructions.
1 D. Mount the sensors with adapters and/or swivels per the manufacturer's instructions.
E. It is the contractor's responsibility to arrange a pre - installation meeting with the manufacturer's
factory authorized representative, at the Owner's facility, to verify placement of sensor and
1 installation criteria.
1
I 02054
MAR 05 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE 11I — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16900 -3
Printed 03/03/05
SECTION 16900
LIGHTING CONTROLS
F. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the best possible
installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or
interference of structural components.
G.. The contractor shall provide, at the Owner's facility, the training to familiarize the Owner's
personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem - solving diagnosis of the lighting
control equipment and systems.
3.02 TESTING
A. The lighting control equipment and systems shall be thoroughly tested to confirm proper operation.
END OF SECTION
•
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
•
1
1
1
1
02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - PHASE III — CE2 /TRANSITIONS
MAR 05 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16900 -4
Printed 03/03/05